Docstoc

Catalogue

Document Sample
Catalogue Powered By Docstoc
					Product
Catalogue
            2006/7




 www.sonifex.co.uk
 t:+44 (0)1933 650 700
 f:+44 (0)1933 650 726
 sales@sonifex.co.uk
              CO N T E N T S


                                              Co n t e n t s
                                                SONIFEX
                                                Stock Codes                                                   2
                                                What’s New?                                                   3
                                                Our History                                                   4
                                                Design Services                                               5

                                                AUDIO INTERFACES
                                                Redbox - Introduction                                         6
                                                Redbox - Digital Audio Converters                             7
                                                Redbox - Synchronisers, Delays & Silence Detectors           12
                                                Redbox - Matching Converters                                 14
                                                Redbox - Audio Distribution Amplifiers                       19




                                                                                                                  CO N T E N T S
                                                Redbox - Headphone Distribution Amplifiers                   22
                                                Redbox - Mixers & Source Selectors                           25
                                                Redbox - Microphone Amplifiers & Limiters                    29
                                                Redbox - Stereo To Mono Converters                           33
                                                Redbox - General Interfaces                                  34

                                                AUDIO LOGGING MACHINES
                                                Net-Log Network Audio Logger                                 36
                                                Net-Log Win Software                                         38

                                                AUDIO TRANSCRIPTION SYSTEMS
                                                D:Scribe Standalone Transcription Systems                    41
                                                D:Scribe Client & Server                                     42
                                                Mentor Time-Server                                           43

                                                MIXING CONSOLES
                                                S2 Digital I/O Analogue Radio Broadcast Mixer                44
                                                S2 Input Channels                                            45
                                                S2 Output Channels                                           51
                                                S2 Meterbridge Modules                                       54
                                                S2 Chassis Sizes                                             56
                                                S2 Mixer Placement in Furniture                              57
                                                S2 Power Supply                                              58

                                                RADIO STUDIO PACKAGES
                                                S2 - Solutions Furniture & Complete Studio Packages          59

                                                SWITCHER & TALKBACK INTERCOMS
                                                Talkback Intercoms - Desktop and Rackmounted Systems         64
                                                Station Master                                               68

                                                TELEPHONE HYBRIDS
                                                Telephone Hybrids - Introduction                             71
                                                HY-03 Series (Analogue)                                      72
                                                DHY-03 Series (Digital)                                      74



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk            1
                                                                                                                                               CO N T E N T S BY S TO C K CO D E


                                      Co n t e n t s B y S t o c k Co d e
                                      Stock Code     Description                                                    Page No   Stock Code   Description                                                   Page No
                                      DHY-03         Automatic Digital TBU, Free Standing                                74   RB-SM1       Single Stereo To Mono Converter                                     33
                                      DHY-03CON      Front Panel Conversion Kit, DHY-03S to DHY-03                       76   RB-SM2       Dual Stereo To Mono Converter                                       33
                                      DHY-03CONF     Conference Cable to Connect 2 x DHY-03 Units                        76   RB-SP1       Digital Splitter & Combiner                                         11
                                      DHY-03EC       Automatic Digital TBU, Eurocard                                     75   RB-SS10      10 Way Stereo Analogue Source Selector/Mixer                        25
                                      DHY-03RLY      Latching Handset Relay Option for DHY-03, S and T                   75   RB-SSML1     Mic/Line Source Selector with Compressor/Limiter                    28
                                      DHY-03S        Automatic Digital TBU, Rack Mounted                                 74   RB-UL1       Single Stereo Unbalanced to Balanced Converter                      14
                                      DHY-03SCON     Front Panel Conversion Kit, DHY-03 to DHY-03S                       76   RB-UL2       Dual Stereo Unbalanced to Balanced Converter                        14
                                      DHY-03T        Twin Automatic Digital TBU, Rack Mounted                            74   RB-UL4       Quad Stereo Unbalanced to Balanced Converter (1U)                   15
                                      DHY-03TCON     Front Panel Conversion Kit, DHY-03 or DHY-03S to DHY-03T            76   RD-02EC      Eurocard Version of RD-02 (non RoHS)                                73
                                      DS-CL01        D:Scribe Client License - 1 Client License                          42   S2-05        S2 5 Channel Mixer Chassis                                          56
                                      DS-CL05        D:Scribe Client License - 5 Client License                          42   S2-10        S2 10 Channel Mixer Chassis                                         56
                                      DS-CL10        D:Scribe Client License - 10 Client License                         42   S2-10SS      S2 10 Script Space (10 Channels Wide)                               56
                                      DS-CL25        D:Scribe Client License - 25 Client License                         42   S2-15        S2 15 Channel Mixer Chassis                                         56
                                      DS-FPS3        D:Scribe Foot-Pedal, 3 Pedal Version With 9 Pin Serial Connector    42   S2-20        S2 20 Channel Mixer Chassis                                         56
                                      DS-FPU3        D:Scribe Foot-Pedal, 3 Pedal Version With USB Connector             42   S2-25        S2 25 Channel Mixer Chassis                                         56
                                      DS-ST01        D:Scribe Standalone License - 1 User License                        41   S2-30        S2 30 Channel Mixer Chassis                                         56
                                      DS-ST05        D:Scribe Standalone License - 5 User License                        41   S2-7SS       S2 7 Script Space (7 Channels Wide)                                 56
                                      DS-ST100       D:Scribe Standalone License - 100 User License                      41   S2-BI        S2 Bus Interlink Cable                                              58
                                      DS-ST25        D:Scribe Standalone License - 25 User License                       41   S2-C6SS      S2 6 Way Stereo Source Select Channel (with EQ)                     49
                                      DS-STS3        D:Scribe Standalone With DS-FPS3 Foot-Pedal, 3 Pedal Version             S2-CB        S2 Blank Channel                                                    50
CO N T E N T S BY S TO C K CO D E S




                                                     'With 9 Pin Serial Connector                                        41   S2-CDS       S2 Digital Dual Sereo Channel                                       48
                                      DS-STU3        D:Scribe Standalone With DS-FPU3 Foot-Pedal, 3 Pedal Version             S2-CDSE      S2 Digital Dual Stereo Channel with EQ                              48
                                                     With USB Connector                                                  41   S2-CML       S2 Mic/Line channel (with EQ)                                       46
                                      DS-SVR         D:Scribe Server License (Note This Needs MS SQL2000 To Operate) 42       S2-CMM       S2 Mic/Mic Channel (with EQ)                                        45
                                      DS-UP2         D:Scribe Standalone V1.0 - V2.0 Upgrade                             41   S2-CS        S2 Dual Stereo Line Channel                                         47
                                      GPS-1          Mentor GPS Receiver, Connects To PC RS232, 1.5m Lead Length         43   S2-CSE       S2 Dual Stereo Line Channel with EQ                                 47
                                      HY-02EC        Eurocard Version of HY-02 (non RoHS)                                73   S2-CSG       S2 Stereo Line & Gram Channel                                       47
                                      HY-03          Automatic Analogue TBU, Free Standing                               72   S2-CSGE      S2 Stereo Line & Gram Channel with EQ                               47
                                      HY-03CON       Front Panel Conversion Kit, HY-03S to HY-03                         73   S2-CSMM      S2 Stereo Mix Minus Channel (with EQ)                               49
                                      HY-03DTD       Dial Tone Detect Add-on Board                                       72   S2-CT        S2 Telco Channel (with EQ)                                          50
                                      HY-03S         Automatic Analogue TBU, Rack Mounted                                72   S2-MB1       S2 Meterbridge Blanking Plate 1 Channel Width                       54
                                      HY-03SCON      Front Panel Conversion Kit, HY-03 to HY-03S                         73   S2-MB2       S2 Meterbridge Blanking Plate 2 Channel Width                       54
                                      HY-03T         Twin Automatic Analogue TBU, Rack Mounted                           72   S2-MB3       S2 Meterbridge Blanking Plate 3 Channel Width                       54
                                      HY-03TCON      Front Panel Conversion Kit, HY-03 or HY-03S to HY-03T               73   S2-MB4       S2 Meterbridge Blanking Plate 4 Channel Width                       54
                                      MTS-100        Mentor Time-Server 100 Client License                               43   S2-MB5       S2 Meterbridge Blanking Plate 5 Channel Width                       54
                                      MTS-25         Mentor Time-Server 25 Client License                                43   S2-ML        S2 Meterbridge Loudspeaker Monitor Panel (3 Channels Wide)          55
                                      MTS-5          Mentor Time-Server 5 Client License                                 43   S2-ML53      S2 Meterbridge LED Meter Panel (3 Channels Wide)                    54
                                      MTS-500        Mentor Time-Server 500 Client License                               43   S2-MPH       S2 Meterbridge Phase Meter Panel (1 Channel Wide)                   54
                                      Net-Log-01     Net-Log 4 Channel Audio Logger With 200GB HDD                       36   S2-MPPM      S2 Meterbridge PPM Meter Panel (5 Channels Wide)                    54
                                      Net-Log-01                                                                              S2-MPPT      S2 Meterbridge True PPM Meter Panel (5 Channels Wide)               54
                                      300GB         Net-Log 4 Channel Audio Logger With 300GB HDD                       36
                                                                                                                              S2-MSB3      S2 Meterbridge Switch Panel with 3 Buttons (1 Channel Wide)         55
                                      Net-Log-01
                                      400GB         Net-Log 4 Channel Audio Logger With 400GB HDD                       36    S2-MT        S2 Meterbridge Dual Timer Panel (3 Channels Wide)                   55
                                      Net-Log-G729 G.729 Software License For One Net-Log (Up To 4 Mono Channels)       37    S2-MTB6      S2 Meterbridge 6 Way Talkback Panel (3 Channels Wide)               55
                                      Net-Log-UPS01 1U Rack-Mount UPS For Use With Net-Log                              40    S2-MTBS      S2 Meterbridge Station Master Talkback Panel (3 Channels Wide)      55
                                      Net-Log-Win01 Net-Log-Win Windows Software - 2 Stream License                     37    S2-MVU       S2 Meterbridge VU Meter Panel (5 Channels Wide)                     54
                                      Net-Log-Win05 Net-Log-Win Windows Software - 5 Stream License                     37    S2-ODA       S2 Digital AUD Output Channel                                       53
                                      RB-ADDA       Combined A/D and D/A Converter (24 bit, 96kHz Capable) (1U)          7    S2-ODAF      S2 Digital AUD Output Channel with Master Fader                     53
                                      RB-ADDA2      Combined A/D and D/A Converter (24 bit, 192kHz Capable) (1U)         8    S2-ODP       S2 Digital PGM Output Channel                                       52
                                      RB-BL2        Single Stereo Bi-Directional Matching Converter                     16    S2-ODPF      S2 Digital PGM Output Channel with Master Fader                     52
                                      RB-BL4        Dual Stereo Bi-Directional Matching Converter                       16    S2-OMC       S2 Control Room Monitor Channel                                     51
                                      RB-DA4x5      4 Input, 4 x 5 Output Distribution Amplifier/Mixer (1U)             20    S2-OMS       S2 Studio Monitor Channel                                           51
                                      RB-DA6        6 Way Stereo Distribution Amplifier (1U)                            19    S2-PG        S2 Penny & Giles Conductive Plastic Fader                           45
                                      RB-DA6G       6 Way Stereo Distribution Amplifier With Output Gain Control (1U)   19    S2-PSU       S2 Mixer Power Supply                                               58
                                      RB-DAC1       Digital to Analogue Converter                                       11    S2-PSUS      S2 Dual Power Supply Switcher                                       58
                                      RB-DDA6A      6 Way Stereo AES/EBU Digital Distribution Amplifier                       SM2          Add On Cards To Upgrade From An SM24 To An SM44                     70
                                                    (24 bit, 96kHz Capable)                                             21    SM24-PPM     Station Master With Switching Talkback For 2 Studios, With PPM Meters68
                                      RB-DDA6S      6 Way Stereo S/PDIF Digital Distribution Amplifier                        SM24-VU      Station Master With Switching Talkback For 2 Studios, With VU Meters68
                                                    (24 bit, 96kHz Capable)                                             21    SM44-PPM     Station Master With Switching Talkback For 4 Studios, With PPM Meters68
                                      RB-DDA6W      6 Way Word Clock Distribution Amplifier                             21    SM44-VU      Station Master With Switching Talkback For 4 Studios, With VU Meters68
                                      RB-DHD6       Digital 6 Way Stereo Headphone Distribution Amplifier               24    SOL-B12      S2 Solutions 12U Support Base 19" Rack                              60
                                      RB-DMA2       Dual Digital Microphone Amplifier                                   30    SOL-CVR60    S2 Solutions 600mm Desk End Cover Panel                             61
                                      RB-DS2        Stereo Delay Synchroniser & Time-Zone Delay (1U)                    12    SOL-CVR80    S2 Solutions 810mm Desk End Cover Panel                             61
                                      RB-DSS10      10 Way Stereo Digital Source Selector                               26    SOL-CVRC     S2 Solutions Cable Hole Covers 80mm Inc Fitting                     60
                                      RB-HD1        Stereo Headphone Amplifier (1U)                                     22    SOL-D12      S2 Solutions 12U Desk Top 19" Rack                                  60
                                      RB-HD2        Dual Stereo Headphone Amplifier (1U)                                22    SOL-D8       S2 Solutions 8U Desk Top 19" Rack                                   60
                                      RB-HD6        6 Way Stereo Headphone Distribution Amplifier (1U)                  23    SOL-FR       S2 Solutions Cage Nut And Screw Kit For 10 Panels (40 Sets)         63
                                      RB-LC3        3 Way Light/Power Controller                                        34    SOL-LGG80    S2 Solutions Table Legs (Pair) Silver 80mm Dia & Mounting Plate     60
                                      RB-LI2        Stereo Line Isolation Unit                                          18    SOL-MB1300   S2 Solutions 1300mm (W) x 900mm (D) Mixer Desk Top                  61
                                      RB-LU4        Quad Stereo Balanced to Unbalanced Converter (1U)                   15    SOL-MB1500   S2 Solutions 1500mm (W) x 900mm (D) Mixer Desk Top                  61
                                      RB-MA1        Single Microphone Amplifier                                         29    SOL-MBC      S2 Solutions Split Desk Centre Mixer Desk Top                       63
                                      RB-MA2        Dual Microphone Amplifier                                           29    SOL-MBCT     S2 Solutions Split Desk Centre Talks Table Mixer Desk Top           63
                                      RB-ML2        Stereo Microphone & Line Level Limiter                              31    SOL-MBL      S2 Solutions Split Desk Mixer Left Hand Corner Desk Top             63
                                      RB-MM1        Mix-Minus Generator                                                 34    SOL-MBR      S2 Solutions Split Desk Mixer Right Hand Corner Desk Top            63
                                      RB-OA3        3 Studio On-Air Switcher                                            35    SOL-MS21     S2 Solutions Monitor Speaker Stands, 21cm High, Black, Pair         61
                                      RB-PA2        Dual Stereo RIAA Phono Amplifier                                    17    SOL-MS32     S2 Solutions Monitor Speaker Stands, 32cm High, Black, Pair         61
                                      RB-PLI6       6 Way Mono Passive Line Isolation Unit                              18    SOL-MS40     S2 Solutions Monitor Speaker Stands, 40cm High, Black, Pair         61
                                      RB-PMX4       10 Input, 4 Output Analogue Pre-set Mixer (1U)                      27    SOL-SB1000   S2 Solutions 1000mm (W) x 600mm (D) Side Return Desk Top            63
                                      RB-RK1        1U Front Rack Kit For Small Redboxes                                 6    SOL-SB1600   S2 Solutions 1600mm (W) x 600mm (D) Side Return Desk Top            63
                                      RB-RK2        1U Rear Rack Kit For Small Redboxes, eg RB-BL2                       6    SOL-T12      S2 Solutions 12U Top 19" Rack Straight Double On Legs               60
                                      RB-RK3        1U Rear Rack Kit For Large Redboxes, eg RB-DA6                       6    TB-6D        Talkback Intercom 6 Way, Desktop Free Standing                      64
                                      RB-SC1        Sample Rate Converter (24 bit, 96kHz Capable)                       10    TB-6R        Talkback Intercom 6 Way, 19" Rack Mounted                           64
                                      RB-SD1        Silence Detection Unit (1U)                                         13    TB-SD        Talkback Intercom Station Master, Desktop Free Standing             66
                                      RB-SL2        Twin Mono, Or Stereo, Limiter                                       32    TB-SR        Talkback Intercom Station Master, 19" Rack Mounted                  66




      2                                                                     Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
W H AT ’S N E W ?


S O N I F E X - W h a t ’s N e w ?
Take a sneak preview of the                              RB-SSML1 Mic/Line Source Selector With              Page 28
                                                         Compressor/Limiter
new products offered within
this catalogue.                                          The RB-SSML1 is a
                                                         1U rack-mountable source
                                                         selector for compressing or
WEEE & RoHS Directives -                                 limiting an incoming
Sonifex Compliance                                       microphone or line signal,
                                                         along with selectable level metering
                From 1st July 2006, all
                                                         and headphone monitor outputs.
                Sonifex manufactured
                products ** are WEEE and
                RoHS compliant.                          RB-OA3 3 Studio On-Air Switcher
                We have used lead free
                                                                                                             Page 35
                solder in electronic                     The RB-OA3 is a 1U rack-
                manufacturing processes for              mount, unity gain on-air




                                                                                                                       W H AT ’S N E W ?
                many months and we like to               switcher, capable of
think that we have a positive, proactive                 switching three stereo pairs
approach to protecting the environment                   between three studios.
with internal recycling of most waste
products produced.
** A list of non-RoHS spare parts, such as the HY-02EC
eurocard, and further information, can be seen at:
http://www.sonifex.co.uk/company/recycling/              DS-UP2 D:Scribe Standalone V1.0 to V2.0             Page 41
                                                         Upgrade Features
S2-PG S2 Penny                               Page 45
& Giles Conductive                                       The V2.0 software has a
Plastic Fader                                            host of new features,
                                                         including dongle based
                                                         licencing.


                                                         S2 - Solutions Furniture & Complete                 Page 59
                                                         Studio Packages

                                                         With years of experience of
                                                         manufacturing and
                                                         distributing radio studio
                                                         equipment, Sonifex is
                                                         perfectly positioned to advise
The input and output channels of an S2                   on the proper equipment
mixer can optionally be fitted with high                 required to get your radio
quality Penny & Giles faders.                            station up and running, on
                                                         time and to budget.
SOL-MS40 Monitor     Page 61
Speaker Stands &
SOL-MBCT Talks Table
The SOL-MS40 are 40cm high hollow black
speaker stands with a cable hole at the top              DHY-03EC Automatic Digital Telephone                Page 75
to allow tidy cabling to the                             Balance Unit Eurocard
monitors.
                                                         The DHY-03EC eurocard single digital
The SOL-MBCT is a talks                                  telephone hybrid uses the same technology
table used in place of                                   as the DHY-03 but is based
the SOL-MBC centre                                       in a card-style format for
section, allowing space for                              installation in a eurocard
the presenter on one side                                rack frame. It is pin
and 3 guests on the other                                compatible with the older
sides. It also has 3 x 1U                                DHY-02EC eurocard, but has the
slots provided for                                       outstanding performance and most
mounting equipment,                                      of the features of the DHY-03, with a
e.g. headphone amps.                                     few differences.


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                  3
                            Our History


                            Sonifex is a Private Limited
                            Company owned by the
                            Directors, which manufactures
                            broadcast audio equipment for
                            the radio, TV, security and
                            telecommunications industries.
                            This is a family business, started
                            as a partnership in 1969 by
                            Paul and Dorothy Brooke,
                            which has had a steady
S O N I F E X H I S TO RY




                            turnover over 37 years of
                            trading, and has established a         The company became a limited company in          History of Product Lines
                            recognised position in the radio       1983 and the operation moved to new              The name Sonifex was synonymous with
                            broadcasting industry.                 purpose built premises at Irthlingborough,       NAB cartridge machines, and carts, for
                                                                   Northamptonshire, during 1986. In 1987,          playing adverts and jingles on the radio.
                                                                   the size of the premises was doubled to          These products had their heyday in the
                                                                   11,000 square feet of production space with      1980's & early 90's with the analogue micro
                                                                   excellent working conditions and facilities      HS redesigned as the digital Discart floppy
                                                                   for recreation. An extension was completed       disk cart machine.
                                                                   in February 1998, adding another 7,000 ft²
                                                                                                                    In 1989 the HY-02 telephone hybrid was
                                                                   of engineering and storage space. Paul
                                                                                                                    developed to enable radio station talk-show
                                                                   retired as Managing Director in 1994, when
                                                                                                                    callers to be heard more clearly and the
                                                                   Marcus Brooke took over. The company
                                                                                                                    HDX2000 hard disk radio automation system
                                                                   presently employs forty three staff with a
                                                                                                                    was released on Windows 3.11™ in 1994, and
                                                                   high percentage of those dedicated to
                                                                                                                    developed on Windows 95/98™ until 1998.
                                                                   R&D projects entirely motivated from
                                                                   within the company.                              The Sovereign analogue radio broadcast
                                                                                                                    mixing console was developed in 1995
                                                                   Over 90% of British radio broadcast studios
                                                                                                                    together with the DHY-02 DSP based
                                                                   have in the past used some form of Sonifex
                                                                                                                    telephone hybrid. 1996 saw the release of the
                                                                   equipment and the company exports on
                                                                                                                    Sentinel 8 channel digital audio logger and
                                                                   average 50% of its products. Sonifex
                                                                                                                    the Solutions radio studio furniture, allowing
                                                                   supplies equipment to over 60 countries
                                                                                                                    us to sell complete radio broadcast studios.
                                                                   world-wide and is recognised for the
                                                                   quality and reliability of its designs and       In 1997 the award winning Courier portable
                                                                   finished equipment.                              flash-card recorder was announced. With its
                                                                                                                    stylish design, built-in recording, scrub-
                                                                   Sonifex manufactures telephony equipment
                                                                                                                    wheel editing, USB and ISDN live audio, the
                                                                   and is authorised as a BABT (British
                                                                                                                    Courier justified its selection as a
                                                                   Approvals Board for Telecommunications)
                                                                                                                    Millennium Product by the UK's Design
                                                                   certified manufacturing facility. Sonifex also
                                                                                                                    Council. Over 850 Couriers have been sold
                                                                   operates a quality system and achieved
                                                                                                                    to the BBC and All India Radio.
                                                                   ISO9002 status in 1999.
                                                                                                                    In 2001, the Net-Log audio logger was born,
                                                                   The constant need to innovate is now an
                                                                                                                    using TCP/IP for playback, and the D:Scribe
                                                                   integral part of the Sonifex culture,
                                                                                                                    transcription system was added in 2004. The
                                                                   combining healthy and outward-looking
                                                                                                                    S2 hybrid analogue/digital mixer replaced
                                                                   ideas with sound and efficient design
                                                                                                                    the Sovereign in 2004 and a talkback system
                                                                   practices. During the next decade Sonifex
                                                                                                                    was developed in the same year.
                                                                   will consolidate its position in the
                                                                   broadcasting and security industries by          The most recent products released have
                                                                   expanding its research and development           been the Redbox range of audio interfaces
                                                                   efforts in order to offer new designs of         designed for systems integrators. Between
                                                                   equipment reflecting the quality and             1999 and 2006 the range has expanded to
                                                                   reliability that is expected by its customers.   over 40 different products.


    4                                              Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
SONIFEX - Design Services
 Bespoke Product Design Services

Sonifex has been at the forefront               products. State of the art machinery is
                                                used throughout and thorough visual and
of audio design and manufacture                 electronic testing is carried out to make
for more than 37 years and has                  sure that the performance of the product
a reputation for building high                  matches up to expectations.
quality, reliable products.                     The test department provides technical
                                                support facilities for customers via
As well as designing in-house award-            telephone, fax, email or via website
winning products, such as the Courier           enquiry.
portable recorder, Sonifex has also
undertaken a number of projects for other       Case Study 1 - Automation
clients. Recent work includes a changeover      Software for Channel 4 TV, UK




                                                                                                             SONIFEX DESIGN SERVICES
unit for the GWR Group, over 1000 digital                                   Sonifex
audio workstations (DAWs) for BBC World                                     originally
Service, over 100 PCXtender DAW units for                                   supplied
Danish Radio, logging systems for the                                       Channel 4 with
Finnish parliament, telephony systems for                                   their hard disk
Northern Telecom, interface systems for                                     recording and
entertainment venues and automated hard         broadcast automation system in 1998
disk announcement systems for both              which was a modified version of the
Channel 4 TV and BBC World Service.             HDX2000 broadcast automation system.
                                                The Channel 4 software was developed so
Sonifex has years of experience in meeting
                                                that continuity announcements at
the demands of our customers. However
                                                Channel 4 could be recorded in advance
complex the problem our skilled sales and
                                                as a 'batch' and then slotted into the
technical support staff will answer any
                                                playlist for automatic playback. The
questions you may have regarding what is
                                                project was completed on time and within
and is not possible. It may be that your
                                                budget and is still in operation today.
requirements could be met by adapting
one of our existing products saving you the     Case Study 2 - DAWs for
time and expense of commissioning a             DR, Denmark
bespoke one. Additionally, our continuous                                   In collaboration
investment in new technology and other                                      with Interstage,
resources ensure that any cost savings are                                  Sonifex's
passed onto you, which means that you                                       Danish
receive state of the art products that match                                distributor,
your needs without damaging your pocket.                                    Sonifex
                                                completed a project for Danish Radio to
The main difference between Sonifex and
                                                produce over 100 desktop units to
other design companies is that we also
                                                connect to their existing journalist's Dalet
manufacture the products ourselves and
                                                workstations. All hardware design, PCB
perform the majority of the manufacturing
                                                layout, case design and manufacturing
in-house, using our team of skilled technical
                                                was carried out on-site at Sonifex in
staff. This means that we have detailed
                                                Irthlingborough.
knowledge of the costs of designs and a
knowledge of which designs can, and             Case Study 3 - DAWs for
cannot, be implemented in practise.             BBC World Service
                                                                           In 2002 and
We ensure that only the most cost-effective,
                                                                           2003, Sonifex
efficient and streamlined solutions are
                                                                           won tenders to
implemented, saving you time and money.
                                                                           supply audio
More importantly, we can control the
                                                                           workstations to
quality of each stage of the design and
                                                                           BBC World
manufacturing process to ensure that the
                                                Service & BBC Local Regions. Supplied
products meet your specification.
                                                through the Oxford Sound Company, over
As a company, Sonifex has excellent             1,000 of the units were shipped within an
technical expertise and facilities for          18 month period at the price quoted and
designing and manufacturing bespoke             to the planned timescale.


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk          5
                                                                                                                                   AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                             R e d b ox - I n t r o d u c t i o n
                                                                  Designed and manufactured to
                                                                  the highest specifications, Redbox                       Visit our webshop at

                                                                  is comprised of a range of                               www.sonifex.co.uk/store

                                                                  analogue and digital audio
                             interfaces for use in a multitude of professional audio applications,                                      Wherever you see this symbol
                             including installations at radio stations, TV studios, home studios,                                       an RB-RK1 rackmount kit can
                                                                                                                                        be used.
                             video suites, production houses and recording studios.
                             Started in 1999, the Redbox range has expanded, by customer
                             demand, to include 40 high quality, useful and reliable units. All of
                             the ideas for new products have come from you, the customers,
                             so if you have a requirement for a new interface, or modifications                                         Wherever you see this symbol
                                                                                                                                        an RB-RK2 small Redbox rear
                             to an existing one, then let us know by sending an email to
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S




                                                                                                                                        panel rack kit ears can be used.
                             sales@sonifex.co.uk. There is more information about our design
                             services on page 5 of this catalogue.

                              Introduction                                                                                              Wherever you see this symbol
                                                                                                                                        an RB-RK3 large Redbox rear
                             Manufactured to the highest standards in       can be used (which include 4 off M6 panel                   panel rack kit ears can be used.
                             our UK offices, utilisation of the finest      fixing screws).
                             components and critical quality control
                                                                            The RB-RK1 can be used with the following
                             techniques ensure that your Redboxes will
                                                                            products:-
                             work every time for years to come. Each
                             Redbox is tested twice by skilled audio        RB-SC1        Sample rate converter            When ordering a Redbox from Sonifex it is helpful if
                                                                                                                           you can specify your required operating voltage. After
                             engineers, before being carefully assembled    RB-UL1        Unbalanced to balanced           the product code add:-
                             and packed. The Redbox range of products                     single converter
                                                                                                                           UK for 230V, UK 3 pin to IEC lead
                             are "fit and forget" because you can set       RB-UL2        Dual unbalanced to               e.g: RB-BL2 UK
                             them up, fit them in your installation and                   balanced converter               EC for 230V, EEC Schuko 2 pin to IEC lead
                             then forget about them - they won't
                             trouble you.                                   RB-BL2        Unbalanced to balanced
                                                                                                                           US for 115V, US 3 pin to IEC lead
                                                                                          bi-directional converter
                             Features                                       RB-PA2        Dual stereo RIAA phono           AU for 230V, Australasian 3 pin to IEC lead
                             Features of the Redbox range :                               amplifier
                             • All are equipped with IEC mains lead and
                                                                            RB-LI2        Stereo line isolation unit
                               instruction manual.
                             • In-house design and manufacture              RB-DDA6A      6 way AES/EBU digital
                                                                                          distribution amplifier

                                                                                                                          “
                               ensures high quality control standards.
                                                                                                                               Manufactured to the highest
                             • All units are 115V 60Hz or 230V 50Hz         RB-DDA6S      6 way S/PDIF digital
                               switchable and all have a front panel LED
                                                                                                                          standards in our UK offices,
                                                                                          distribution amplifier
                               power indicator.                                                                           utilisation of the finest components
                                                                            RB-DDA6W      6 way word clock
                             • Manufactured within ISO9000 standards                                                      and critical quality control
                                                                                          distribution amplifier
                               and guaranteed CE compliant.                                                               techniques ensure that your
                             • Housed in eye catching red anodised          RB-MA1        Single microphone amplifier
                                                                                                                          Redboxes will work every time for
                               aluminium cases.

                                                                                                                                                ”
                                                                            RB-MA2        Dual microphone amplifier       years to come.
                             All the Redboxes are screw mountable as        RB-ML2        Stereo microphone & line
                             standard and are either rack-mounted or                      level limiter
                             have the option to be rack-mounted. The                                                      Rear Panel Mounting
                                                                            RB-SL2        Twin mono, or stereo, limiter
                                                                                                                          For rear panel mounting you can use either
                             RB-RK rack mount kits can be attached to
                                                                            RB-SM1        Single stereo to mono           the RB-RK2, or RB-RK3, depending on the
                             the front or the rear of the Redbox products
                                                                                          converter                       size of your Redbox.
                             so that they can be rack mounted into a
                             standard 19 inch rack frame in 1U of space.    RB-SM2        Dual stereo to mono             RB-RK2 1U rear panel rack kit for small
                                                                                          converter                       Redbox range, e.g., RB-BL2
                             Rack Mounting
                                                                            RB-LC3        Light/Power controller          RB-RK3 1U rear panel rack kit for large
                             For rack mounting smaller (28cm) units the
                             optional RB-RK1 (Red) or RB-RK1B (Black) kit   RB-MM1        Mix-minus generator             Redbox range, e.g., RB-DA6.


     6                                                     Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - D i g i t a l Au d i o Co nve r t e r s
 RB-ADDA Combined A/D and D/A Converter                                                                        Analogue to Digital Conversion
                                                                                                               A/D Audio Specification For RB-ADDA
                                                                                                               Maximum
The RB-ADDA A/D and D/A converter is a 1U                   Auto Mode                                          Input Level:     +27dBu balanced inputs, +17dBu
                                                                                                                                unbalanced inputs
rack-mount which produces an AES/EBU or                     Here the unit synchronises to the digital          Input
S/PDIF level digital audio output from a                    audio sync signal if present at the digital        Impedance:       >10k unbalanced, >20k bridging
                                                                                                                                balanced
balanced XLR or unbalanced phono stereo                     input and uses the internal master clock           Dynamic
audio input. It also produces a stereo                      only if no sync input signal is detected. In       Range:           >110dB
                                                                                                               Gain Range:      Adjustable input gain of ±3dB on
balanced XLR or unbalanced phono output                     this case, the internal master clock is used at                     12dBu, 18dBu or 24dBu, ref FSD
from an incoming AES/EBU or S/PDIF digital                  the selected sample rate.                          Distortion
                                                                                                               and Noise:       >96dB THD + N at 1kHz
input signal. The unit operates in four modes:
                                                            Auto Lock Mode                                     A/D Connections
Master Mode                                                 This operates like the auto mode except            Analogue
                                                                                                               Inputs:          2 x XLR 3 pin (balanced)
In this mode the unit receives an analogue                  that if no sync input signal is detected, it                        2 x RCA phono (unbalanced)
audio signal, which is digitised and                        will use the internal master clock to sync to      Digital Outputs: 1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male
                                                                                                                                1 x S/PDIF RCA phono




                                                                                                                                                                        D I G I TA L AU D I O CO N V E R T E R S
formatted for digital serial transmission                   the sample rate which was last clocked to.
                                                                                                               Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
(IEC958). The necessary clock signals are                                                                                       220-240V, fused, 10W max
                                                            When operating in sync modes, the front
generated internally from an on board                                                                          Operational Controls
                                                            panel power LED flashes whenever the
master clock at a selectable rate (32kHz,                                                                      Analogue
                                                            unit is not synchronised to the incoming           Input Select:    XLR or phono, via push-switch
44.1kHz, 48kHz or 96kHz).
                                                            digital signal.                                    Digital
                                                                                                               Output Select:   AES/EBU or S/PDIF, via push-switch
Slave Mode                                                  The analogue inputs have left and right            Digital
In this mode the unit automatically detects                                                                    Input Select:    AES/EBU or S/PDIF, via push-switch
                                                            level controls using pre-set potentiometers        De-emphasis
the presence of a digital audio sync signal,                                                                   On/Off:          DIP switch
                                                            and DIP switches allowing a signal range
if present at the digital input, and                                                                           Input Level
                                                            from +9dBu to +27dBu. The RCA phono                Adjust:          DIP switch & pre-set pots
synchronises the digital output to it.
                                                            inputs have a further 10dB gain                    Sample Rates:    Master rates of 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
If no sync is present, no output will be                                                                                        or 96kHz, or can synchronise to
                                                            incorporated to give a total gain range of                          incoming 32kHz to 100kHz sample rate
generated.
                                                            -1dBu to +17dBu for full-scale digits. The         Bit Depth:       16, 20 or 24 bits via DIP switch
                                                            analogue outputs have an output level              Modes &
                                                                                                               Frequencies:     16 way rotary DIP switch
                                                            control, allowing full-scale settings
                                                                                                               Channel
                                                                                                               Status Bits:     Forced to consumer mode or
                                                                                                                                professional mode, via DIP switch
                                                                                                               Output Level
                                                                                                               Adjust:          DIP switch




 Digital to Analogue Conversion
                                                            selectable from +12dBu, +18dBu or +24dBu.         sample rates above 48kHz as they are not
 D/A Audio Specification For RB-ADDA
 Maximum
                                                            There are factory-set internal level controls     supported by the Consumer Mode. For
 Output Level:     +24dBu balanced output, +14dBu           for the analogue outputs allowing gain            sample rates of 32kHz, 44.1kHz and 48kHz,
                   unbalanced output
 Output
                                                            adjustment of ±1dB.                               the status bits can be forced to either
 Impedance:        <50    balanced, <75   unbalanced                                                          Professional or Consumer Mode.
 Dynamic Range: >100dB                                      There are buttons to select either the
 Gain Range:       Selectable 12dBu, 18dBu or 24dBu         AES/EBU or S/PDIF input or output for the         Additionally, if de-emphasis is selected, the
                   output level, ref FSD
                                                            D/A and A/D sections respectively.                RB-ADDA will decode 50/15µs emphasis
 D/A Connections
                                                                                                              when indicated by certain channel status
 Digital Inputs:   1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female             The output bit depth can be selected from
                   1 x S/PDIF RCA phono                                                                       bits in the incoming digital audio data.
 Analogue
                                                            16, 20 or 24 bits. Inputs of a different bit
 Outputs:          2 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced)            depth to the output are dithered using a          The RB-ADDA has a calibration routine for
                   2 x RCA phono (unbalanced)
                                                            noise filter.                                     optimum performance, which allows the
 Equipment Type
                                                                                                              noise floor and dynamic range to improve
 RB-ADDA:          Combined A/D and D/A converter           For the digital output, there is a switch
 Physical Specification
                                                                                                              by 1-2dB.
                                                            available to define the content of the
 Weight:           Nett: 1.6kg Gross: 2.2kg
                                                            channel status bits embedded within the           The calibration cycle operates by calibrating
 Dimensions
 (Raw):            48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)   digital audio stream. The channel status bits     the gain and the zero reference of the
 (Boxed):          53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                                            will be forced to Professional Mode for           A/D converter.


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                           7
                                                                                                                                            AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                           R e d b ox - D i g i t a l Au d i o Co nve r t e r s
                                            RB-ADDA2 A/D and D/A Converter, 24 bit 192kHz
D I G I TA L AU D I O CO N V E R T E R S




                                                                                      192


                                                                                     The RB-ADDA2 A/D and D/A converter is a         The A/D SOURCE push-button is used to


                                           “
                                                                                     1U rack-mount which produces an AES/EBU,        select from either the balanced or
                                               A 1U rack-mount which
                                                                                     S/PDIF or TOSlink optical level digital audio   unbalanced stereo analogue inputs and
                                           produces an AES/EBU, S/PDIF or            output from a balanced XLR or unbalanced        this push-button also defines the input
                                           TOSlink optical level digital audio       phono stereo audio input. It also produces a    level for full scale digits at one of +12dBFS,
                                           output from a balanced XLR or             stereo balanced XLR or unbalanced phono         +18dBFS or +24dBFS. These values can
                                           unbalanced phono stereo                   output from an incoming AES/EBU, S/PDIF         then be fine-tuned by using rear-panel pre-


                                                       ”
                                           audio input.                              or TOSlink optical digital input signal.        set potentiometers which give another
                                                                                                                                     ±3dB of gain adjustment, allowing a signal
                                                                                     The RB-ADDA2 is a high performance,
                                                                                                                                     range from +9dBu to +27dBu. The RCA
                                                                                     enhanced version of the RB-ADDA
                                                                                                                                     phono inputs have a further 10dB gain
                                                                                     providing the following additional features:
                                                                                                                                     incorporated to give a total gain range of
                                                                                     • It supports higher sample frequency
                                                                                                                                     -1dBu to +17dBu for full-scale digits.
                                                                                       rates up to and including 176.4kHz and
                                                                                       192kHz.                                       For the digital output, there are three
                                                                                     • It has additional independent AES/EBU         push-button switches to select the sample
                                                                                       and Word Clock synchronising inputs, so       frequency, bit depth and status bit modes.
                                                                                       that the A/D and D/A sections can             The FREQUENCY button allows selection of
                                                                                       operate independently, with the digital       the master sample frequency from one of
                                                                                       outputs synchronised to an external           32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz,
                                                                                       master reference clock.                       176.4kHz or 192kHz. The BITS button sets
                                                                                     • It has TOSlink optical digital audio input    the output bit depth as one of 16, 20 or 24
                                                                                       and output.                                   bits, and the CS DATA button defines the
                                                                                     • It has front panel push-button switches       content of the channel status bits
                                                                                       for all the main settings. The buttons are    embedded within the digital audio stream.
                                                                                       arranged in sets, where pressing the          The channel status bits will be forced to
                                                                                       button advances the current selection         Professional Mode for sample rates above
                                                                                       and LED indicator.                            48kHz as they are not supported by the
                                                                                     • A serial RS232 port is included so that the   Consumer Mode. For sample rates of
                                                                                       RB-ADDA2 settings can be controlled           32kHz, 44.1kHz and 48kHz, the status bits
                                                                                       remotely. The front panel LED indicators      can be forced to either Professional Mode
                                                                                       alter automatically when using RS232          (PRO), Consumer Mode (CON) or to follow
                                                                                       commands.                                     the mode of the input (FOLLOW).


       8                                                             Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - D i g i t a l Au d i o Co nve r t e r s
 RB-ADDA2 A/D and D/A Converter, 24 bit 192kHz (continued...)




The SYNC button is used to select the                Auto Lock Mode
synchronisation input, from Word Clock,

                                                                                                                “
                                                     This operates like the auto mode except
                                                                                                                    The RB-ADDA2 is a high
AES/EBU or the D/A input, and also the               that if no sync signal is present the unit will
synchronisation mode of the digital output.          run at the closest master clock rate to the
                                                                                                                performance, enhanced version of
The A/D section of the RB-ADDA2 operates             last locked incoming signal. The                           the RB-ADDA but with additional
in four selectable modes:

Master Mode
In this mode the unit receives an analogue
                                                     FREQUENCY LED will indicate the
                                                     synchronised sample frequency.

                                                     When operating in sync modes, the SYNC
                                                                                                                features.
                                                                                                                                ”
audio signal, which is digitised and formatted       button flashes whenever the unit is not




                                                                                                                                                                             D I G I TA L AU D I O CO N V E R T E R S
for digital serial transmission (IEC958). The        synchronised to the incoming digital
necessary clock signals are generated                signal.
internally from an on board master clock at a
                                                     The D/A section has one SOURCE push-
selectable rate (32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz,
                                                     button which is used to select the digital
88.2kHz, 96kHz, 176.4kHz or 192kHz).
                                                     input source from AES/EBU, S/PDIF or
Slave Mode                                           TOSlink optical and which also sets the
In this mode the unit is synchronised to an          analogue output level to be generated for
external source, using the digital audio sync        full scale digits, from either +12dBFS,
or D/A input signal from which the clock             +18dBFS or +24dBFS. There are factory-set
signals are stripped, or to the TTL level Word       internal level controls for fine tuning the
Clock. The FREQUENCY LED will indicate the           analogue output gain adjustment. If no
synchronised sample frequency and if no              digital audio source is present, the D/A
sync is present, no output will be generated.        SOURCE button flashes.

Auto Mode                                            The RB-ADDA2 automatically decodes
Here, the unit is synchronised to an external        50/15µs emphasis if this is indicated by
source, using the digital audio sync or D/A          certain channel status bits in the incoming
input signal from which the clock signals are        digital audio data.
stripped, or to the TTL level Word Clock. If no
                                                     In both A/D and D/A sections, audio is sent
sync signal is present the unit runs from the
                                                     to all of the outputs simultaneously.
onboard master clock at a rate selected by
the front panel control (32kHz, 44.1kHz,             A red LED indicates when power to the
48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, 176.4kHz or 192kHz).          RB-ADDA2 is on.

Analogue to Digital Conversion                       A/D Operational Controls                                   D/A Connections
A/D Audio Specification For RB-ADDA2                 Analogue        Balanced XLR or unbalanced phono, via      Digital Inputs:   1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female
                                                     Input Source:   A/D SOURCE push-button                                       1 x S/PDIF RCA phono
Maximum         +27dBu balanced inputs, +17dBu                                                                                    1 x TOSlink optical
Input Level:    unbalanced inputs                    Analogue
                                                     Input Level     +12dBFS, +18dBFS or +24dBFS, via A/D       Analogue
                                                     for FSD:        SOURCE push-button                         Outputs:          2 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced)
Input           >10k unbalanced, >20k bridging                                                                                    2 x RCA phono (unbalanced)
Impedance:      balanced                             Analogue
                                                     Input Level     +9dBu to +27dBu via rear-panel
Dynamic Range: >110dB                                Adjust:         pre-set pots                               D/A Operational Controls
Gain Range:     Adjustable input gain of ±3dB on     Sample          32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz,
                selected +12dBu, +18dBu or +24dBu,                                                              Digital           AES/EBU, S/PDIF or TOSlink optical, via
                                                     Frequency       176.4kHz or 192kHz, via FREQUENCY          Input Select:     push-button
                ref FSD                              Rates:          push-button
Distortion                                                                                                      Analogue          Selectable +12dBu, +18dBu or +24dBu
                                                     Bit Depth:      16, 20 or 24 bits, via BITS push-button    Output Level      output level, ref FSD, via D/A SOURCE
& Noise:        >96dB THD + N at 1kHz
                                                     Channel         Consumer mode, professional mode or        for FSD:          push-button
                                                     Status Bits:    follow input, via CS DATA push-button
A/D Connections
                                                     Sync Input      AES/EBU, Word Clock or D/A input, via      Equipment Type
Analogue                                             Select:         SYNC push-button
Inputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin (balanced)                                                                        RB-ADDA2:         Combined A/D and D/A converter,
                2 x RCA phono (unbalanced)           Sync Mode       Master, slave, auto, auto lock, via SYNC                     24 bit 192kHz
                                                     Select:         push-button
Sync Inputs:    1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female
                1 x TTL Word clock BNC                                                                          Physical Specification
                                                     Digital to Analogue Conversion
Digital Outputs: 1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male                                                                     Weight:           Nett: 1.7kg Gross: 2.3kg
                                                     D/A Audio Specification For RB-ADDA2
                 1 x S/PDIF RCA phono                                                                           Dimensions
                 1 x TOSlink optical                 Maximum         +24dBu balanced output, +14dBu             (Raw):            48cm (W) x 15.8cm (D *) x 4.2cm
                                                     Output Level:   unbalanced output                                            (H) (1U)
Serial RS232:   1 x 9 pin D-type plug                Output                                                     (Boxed):          53cm (W) x 25.5cm (D *) x 6cm (H)
Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, continuously rated     Impedance:      <50   balanced, <75    unbalanced
                85-264VAC @ 47-63Hz, 10W max         Dynamic Range: >110dB                                      * Note that this product is deeper than standard Redboxes.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                                9
                                                                                                                                                          AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                           R e d b ox - D i g i t a l Au d i o Co nve r t e r s
                                             RB-SC1 Sample Rate Converter                                                                       Audio Specification For RB-SC1
                                                                                                                                                Dynamic Range: 120dB
                                                                                                                                                Distortion
                                           Ideal for the transfer of digital audio            Slave Mode                                        and Noise:       -114dB THD + N at 1kHz, ref 0dB FS

                                           between different digital equipment, the RB-                                                         Input
                                                                                              In this mode the digital output sample rate       Impedance:       75 S/PDIF inputs
                                           SC1 sample rate converter standardises the         follows the sync input. When the sync                              110 AES/EBU input
                                                                                                                                                                 50 BNC TTL word clock input
                                           sample rate of a digital audio signal to one of    signal is not present the digital output is       Sample           Master rates of 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
                                           32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz or 96kHz, or to a            turned off.                                       Frequency        or 96kHz, or can synchronise to
                                                                                                                                                Range:           incoming 32kHz to 100kHz sample rate
                                           synchronising input.
                                                                                                                                                Bit Depth:       Up to and including 24 bit
                                                                                                                                                Rear Panel Connections
                                           Both audio inputs and outputs have push-                                                             and Controls
                                           button switches to select either AES/EBU or
                                           S/PDIF. The synchronising input can be
                                           selected from one of AES/EBU, S/PDIF or
                                                                                               “   Both audio inputs and outputs
                                                                                               have push-button switches to select
                                                                                               either AES/EBU or S/PDIF.
                                                                                                                                                Inputs:



                                                                                                                                                Outputs:
                                                                                                                                                                 2 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female (audio
                                                                                                                                                                 and sync)
                                                                                                                                                                 2 x S/PDIF RCA phono (audio and sync)
                                                                                                                                                                 1 x TTL BNC female (sync)
                                                                                                                                                                 1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male
                                           TTL word clock.                                                                                                       1 x S/PDIF RCA phono
                                                                                               The synchronising input can be
D I G I TA L AU D I O CO N V E R T E R S




                                                                                                                                                Input Select:    Push-button switch between AES/EBU
                                           There are four modes of operation of the            selected from one of AES/EBU,                                     and S/PDIF



                                                                                                                              ”
                                           RB-SC1 dependent on how you want to                 S/PDIF or TTL word clock.                        Output Select:   Push-button switch between AES/EBU
                                                                                                                                                                 and S/PDIF
                                           synchronise the output to the input :                                                                Sync Select:     Push-button switch between AES/EBU
                                                                                                                                                                 and S/PDIF, with DIP switch
                                           Master Mode                                                                                                           selection between TTL and the other
                                                                                                                                                                 two inputs.
                                           In this mode the digital                                                                             Operational
                                           output sample rate is                                                                                Modes:           Master mode, auto sync mode, auto
                                                                                                                                                                 lock mode and slave mode, set via
                                           simply set by, and                                                                                                    rotary switch
                                           locked to, the                                                                                       Status Bits:     Forced to consumer mode, professional
                                                                                                                                                                 mode, or set to follow input with DIP
                                           internal on-board                                                                                                     switch selection.
                                           clock generator. No                                                                                  Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, continuously rated
                                                                                                                                                                 85-264VAC @ 47-63Hz, max 10W
                                           sync signal is used or required.                                                                     Equipment Type
                                                                                                                                                RB-SC1:          Sample rate converter
                                           Auto Sync Mode                                                                                       Physical Specification
                                           In this mode the digital output sample rate                                                          Weight:          Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.4kg
                                           follows the sync input. When the sync signal                                                         Dimensions
                                                                                                                                                (Raw):           28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                           is not present the output sample rate will be                                                        (Boxed):         36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                           set by, and locked to, the internal on-board
                                           clock generator at a frequency determined
                                           by the switch position.
                                                                                              There are also switches available to define the   As well as indicating that power is
                                           Auto Lock Mode                                     content of the channel status bits embedded       present on the unit, the LED on the
                                           In this mode no output will be generated           within the digital audio stream. The channel      front panel has a secondary role to
                                           until lock is achieved with a sync signal. The     status bits will be forced to Professional Mode   indicate the status of the digital inputs.
                                           digital output sample rate now follows the         for sample rates above 48kHz as they are not      Fast flashing between red and amber
                                           sync input. If the sync signal is removed then     supported by the Consumer Mode. For               indicates a loss of a digital input signal
                                           the output sample rate will be set by, and         sample rates of 32kHz, 44.1kHz and 48kHz,         and slow flashing between red and
                                           locked to, the internal on-board clock             the status bits can be either set to follow the   amber indicates the absence of a
                                           generator at the closest frequency available       input signal type, or can be forced to either     synchronising input when not in
                                           to the previous sync input.                        Professional or Consumer Mode.                    Master Mode.




                                           RB-SC1 Sample Rate Converter Flowchart.



10                                                                            Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - D i g i t a l Au d i o Co nve r t e r s
 Audio Specification For RB-DAC1
                                                              RB-DAC1 Digital To Analogue Converter
 Maximum
 Output Level:     +24dBu balanced, +14dBu unbalanced
                   +12dBu headphone
 Output                                                     Using 24 bit, 96kHz capable devices, the              There is a button to select either the
 Impedance:        <50    balanced, <75   unbalanced        RB-DAC1 D/A Converter is a 1U rack-mount              AES/EBU or S/PDIF input for the D/A
 Dynamic Range: >100dB
                                                            which produces a stereo balanced XLR or               converter, which is located on the rear
 Gain Range:       Selectable 12dBu, 18dBu or 24dBu
                   output level, ref FSD                    unbalanced phono output from an incoming              panel. Additionally, if de-emphasis is
 Headphone                                                  AES/EBU or S/PDIF digital input signal. There         selected, the RB-DAC1 will decode 50/15µs
 Output:           Drives 150mW into 32 to
                   600 professional headphones              is also a headphone output with volume                emphasis when indicated by certain
 Distortion                                                 control for monitoring purposes.                      channel status bits in the incoming digital
 & Noise:          <0.01% THD + N @1kHz, ref 0dBu
                                                                                                                  audio data.
 Sample Freq.                                               The analogue outputs have an output level
 Range:            30kHz - 100kHz
 Operational Controls
                                                            control, allowing full-scale settings                 When operating, the front panel power
 Digital Input                                              selectable from +12dBu, +18dBu or +24dBu.             LED flashes whenever the unit is not
 Select:           AES/EBU or S/PDIF, via push-button       The RCA phono outputs have a further                  synchronised to the incoming
 Gain Select:      DIP switch




                                                                                                                                                                            D I G I TA L AU D I O CO N V E R T E R S
                                                            8.5dBu attenuation incorporated.                      digital signal.
 De-emphasis
 On/Off:           DIP switch
 Connections
 Digital Inputs:   1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female
                   1 x S/PDIF RCA phono
 Analogue
 Outputs:          2 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced)
                   2 x RCA phono (unbalanced)
 Headphone
 Output:           1 x ¼” (6.35mm) A/B-gauge
                   3-pole stereo jack sockets
 Mains Input:      Filtered IEC, 110V-120V, or
                   220-240V, fused, 10W max
 Equipment Type
 RB-DAC1:          Digital to analogue converter
 Physical Specification
 Weight:           Nett: 1.4kg Gross: 2.0kg
 Dimensions
 (Raw):            48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
 (Boxed):          53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)


  RB-SP1 Digital Splitter & Combiner

The RB-SP1 digital splitter & combiner is                    Audio Specification For RB-SP1                        Connections
used to interface various double sampling                    Input                                                 Audio Inputs:   2 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female
                                                             Impedance:      110    ±20% balanced (AES/EBU)                        (balanced)
pieces of equipment. Some older                                                                                                    2 x S/PDIF RCA phono female
                                                             Input
equipment uses 2 AES/EBU connectors for                      Impedance:      75    ±5% unbalanced (S/PDIF)                         (unbalanced) (Input button selects
                                                                                                                                   between AES/EBU and S/PDIF)
double sampling with each connector                          Signal Level:   3V/10V peak to peak min/max
                                                                             (AES/EBU)                             Audio Outputs: 2 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male (balanced)
carrying an audio signal at a normal frame                                   0.5V ±20% peak to peak (S/PDIF)                      2 x S/PDIF RCA phono female
                                                                                                                                  (unbalanced), (Output button selects
rate, whilst other equipment has a single                    Bit Depth:      Up to and including 24 bit                           between AES/EBU and S/PDIF)
connector using twice the frame rate.                        Distortion                                            Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, continuously rated
                                                             & Noise:        -114dB THD + N at 1kHz, ref 0dB FS                    85-264VAC @ 47-63Hz, max 10W
The RB-SP1 can interface between them,                       Output                                                Equipment Type
either combining the signals from 2 XLR's                    Impedance:      110    ±20% balanced (AES/EBU)
                                                                                                                   RB-SP1:         Digital splitter & combiner
                                                             Output
into 1, or splitting the signal from                         Impedance:      75    ±5% unbalanced (S/PDIF)         Physical Specification
1 XLR into 2.                                                Sample                                                Weight:         Nett: 1.6kg Gross: 2.2kg
                                                             Freq Range:     30-100kHz (i.e. including 32kHz,      Dimensions
                                                                             44.1kHz,48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz and     (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
The RB-SP1 can also be used for interfacing                                  96kHz)                                (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
stereo and mono signals to digital mixing                    Dynamic Range: 120dB
desks by splitting the left and right signals
of a stereo XLR to two separate XLR's, and
vice versa by combining them.

Additionally, a sample rate converter on the
second digital input can be used to convert
the sample rate of the secondary input to
that of the primary input. The RB-SP1 can
handle sample rates up to 96kHz and
sample sizes of 16, 20 and 24 bit.

There are two types of operation : Split 96,
and Stereo/Mono. These each have three                      Both inputs and outputs can be selected as
different switch modes : Split, Bypass and                  either AES/EBU or S/PDIF with the resultant
Combine.                                                    digital level following the switch selection.

Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                  11
                                                                                                                                                                                                        AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                                                        R e d b ox - Sy n c h r o n i s e r s , D e l ays & S i l e n ce D e t e c t o r s
                                                                          RB-DS2 Stereo Delay Synchroniser & Time-Zone Delay

                                                                        The RB-DS2 is a stereo audio delay synchroniser          (42 secs at 48kHz, 16 bit). An internal                     The analogue output gain range can be
                                                                        used for resynchronising audio to video                  Compact Flash™ expansion allows up to 2GB                   altered in software from -6dBu to +24dBu
                                                                        following delay processes such as standards              of memory to be accessed providing delay                    output level, ref FSD.
                                                                        conversion, transmission delay, logo insertion,          times of over 3.5 hours, for example, to delay
                                                                                                                                                                                             Both analogue and digital outputs can be
                                                                        video aspect ratio conversion and network                a programme output across different time-
                                                                                                                                                                                             separately muted and a front panel Bypass
                                                                        delays. It can be used for fixed installations to        zones, or to shift a broadcast programme by
                                                                                                                                                                                             button disengages electro-mechanical relays
                                                                        correct a permanent audio delay, or on an                1 hour for a satellite rebroadcast. Delay times
                                                                                                                                                                                             to divert both analogue and digital inputs to
                                                                        intermittent basis to provide occasional                 can be selected in samples, fields, frames,
                                                                                                                                                                                             their outputs. This is also disengaged
                                                                        correction, for example for live links. Accepting        milliseconds and, with the Compact Flash™
                                                                                                                                                                                             automatically when a power-fail occurs.
                                                                        digital audio signals up to 96kHz, 24 bit, the           expansion, in hh:mm:ss. Frame and field
                                                                        sonic quality of the RB-DS2 is superb and silent         definitions can be for PAL (25 frame) or NTSC
                                                                                                                                                                                             All of the settings in the unit can be saved
                                                                        switching is used to provide the smoothest,              (30 frame) signals.
                                                                                                                                                                                             to one of 8 configuration settings. These
S YN C H R O N I S E R S , D E L AYS & S I L E N C E D E T E C TO R S




                                                                        cleanest audio delay available.
                                                                                                                                 A front panel blue vacuum fluorescent                       Configs can be viewed, edited, saved and
                                                                        The RB-DS2 has both balanced analogue and                display with rotary controller is used for                  loaded, and also remotely loaded by using
                                                                        AES/EBU digital audio inputs and outputs on              selecting the various settings of the delay,                one of the 8 GPI contacts, meaning that any
                                                                        3 pin XLR connectors. It can act as a combined           which include the source (analogue or                       setting, such as delay time or Bypass, can be
                                                                        A/D and D/A unit meaning that analogue                   digital), channels, sample rate, sample bit                 altered instantaneously using a GPI signal.
                                                                        inputs can be delayed and output as AES/EBU              width, format (PAL or NTSC), delay units and                The RB-DS2 also has an RS232 serial port for
                                                                        or vice-versa. It is a stereo delay, but can also        the delay itself. Additionally, input peak                  remotely controlling the unit and there are
                                                                        be used as a dual mono delay, to process each            digits can be selected from +12dBu, +18dBu                  4 remote outputs which can be used for
                                                                        audio path separately, or as a mono delay only.          and +24dBu for FSD and two left and right                   signalling. The front panel controls can be
                                                                                                                                 pre-set potentiometers on the rear panel                    locked-out for situations where remote
                                                                        As standard the RB-DS2 can provide up to 10.5            allow the input gain range to be altered by                 control is being used to run the unit, or
                                                                        seconds of delay at 96kHz sampling, 24 bit               ±3dB around the selected peak digits.                       where physical security is required.




                                                                         Audio Specification For RB-DS2                          Analogue          Selectable -6dBu to +24dBu output         Serial Comms    9-way 'D'-type plug
                                                                         A/D Specification                                       Output Gain       level, ref FSD                            Port:
                                                                                                                                 Range:                                                      Memory          Internal Compact Flash™ storage card
                                                                         Maximum         +27dBu
                                                                         Input Level:                                            Sampling          Selectable 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz,         Expansion:      supporting up to 2GB.
                                                                                                                                 Frequency:        64kHz, 88.2kHz or 96kHz                   Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, continuously rated 100-240
                                                                         Input
                                                                         Impedance:      > 10k    bridging                       Sample Width:     Selectable 16bit or 24bit                                 VAC, 47-63Hz, fused, 60W peak, 30W
                                                                                                                                 Channels:         Stereo or dual mono                                       average
                                                                         Analogue &      Selectable +12dBu, +18dBu, +24dBu
                                                                         Digital Input   for FSD                                 Format            PAL, NTSC                                 Front Panel Controls
                                                                         Levels:                                                 (Fields &                                                   Display:        Vacuum fluorescent display
                                                                         Analogue        Adjustable 3dB loss to 3dB gain         Frames):                                                    System          Rotary selector with integral
                                                                         Pre-set Input   (L & R adjust)                          Delay Units:      Samples, fields, frames, milliseconds,    Navigation:     push-switch
                                                                         Gain Range:                                                               hh:mm:ss, (with CF expansion)             Audio Bypass:   Via push-button
                                                                         Signal to Noise: Better than -101dBFS (RMS A-weighted   Maximum Delay:10.5 seconds @ 96kHz, 24bit, stereo           Equipment Type
                                                                                          at 24bit)                                            (excluding memory expansion)
                                                                                                                                                                                             RB-DS2:         Stereo delay synchroniser &
                                                                         Dynamic Range: > 110dB                                  Rear Panel Connections                                                      time-zone delay
                                                                         Distortion      > 96dB THD + N at 1kHz                  Analogue          2 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced) (L & R)   Physical Specification
                                                                         & Noise:                                                Inputs:
                                                                                                                                                                                             Weight:         Nett: 1.7kg Gross: 2.3kg
                                                                         D/A Specification                                       Analogue          2 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced) (L & R)
                                                                                                                                 Outputs:                                                    Dimensions
                                                                         Maximum         +24dBu                                                                                              (Raw):          48cm (W) x 15.8cm (D *) x 4.3cm (H)
                                                                         Output Level:                                           Digital Inputs:   1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female              (1U)
                                                                         Output          < 50                                    Digital Outputs: 1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male                 (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 25.5cm (D *) x 6cm (H)
                                                                         Impedance:                                              Remote I/O Port: 15-way 'D'-type plug, 8 GPI inputs,        * Note that this product is deeper than standard
                                                                         Dynamic Range: > 100dB                                                   4 GPI outputs                              Redboxes




12                                                                                                            Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - Sy n c h r o n i s e r s , D e l ays & S i l e n ce D e t e c t o r s
                                                                                                  Audio Specification For RB-SD1
  RB-SD1 Silence Detection Unit
                                                                                                  Maximum
                                                                                                  Input Level:     +28dBu
                                                                                                  Maximum
The RB-SD1 silence detection unit is a 1U       can be set remotely, which is useful if you       Output Level:    +28dBu
rack-mount device used to monitor an            are expecting to broadcast a long silence.        Frequency
                                                                                                  Response:        20Hz - 20kHz ±0.1dB
unattended stereo studio feed and in the                                                          Gain:            +8dB (for unbal input B - optional)
                                                The unit can be configured to alarm when
event of the signal going “quiet” after a                                                         Distortion:      As input for balanced input, <0.05% ref
                                                either the left or right channel of the main                       +8dBu output for unbalanced input
given period the unit will switch through an
                                                input source fails, or if the whole stereo        Input
alternative stereo audio signal. This signal                                                      Impedance:       >100k    balanced
                                                signal fails. There are also options to set the
could be a recorded message (e.g. “normal                                                         Output
                                                remote start output as momentary or               Impedance:       As input, except when using
service will be resumed”, etc), a feed from a                                                                      unbalanced auxiliary input where
                                                latched, to disable switching to the                               output impedance <50
CD player or minidisc machine, or an
                                                auxiliary input on alarming and to increase       Noise:           <-87dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
alternative recorded programme. Controls                                                                           for unbal input
                                                the gain on the auxiliary input so that an
are provided to start external equipment                                                          Rear Panel Connections and Controls
                                                unbalanced input can be used, for example,
and to provide remote status indication.                                                          Inputs (Main




                                                                                                                                                              S YN C H R O N I S E R S , D E L AYS & S I L E N C E D E T E C TO R S
                                                from a domestic minidisc player.                  & Auxiliary):    4 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced,
                                                                                                                   auxiliary can be unbalanced)
It has 2 balanced stereo audio inputs with
                                                Front panel LED indicators show                   Output:          2 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced)
the maximum input level being +28dBu.                                                             Remotes:         15 way D-type plug
                                                individually left and right programme and
Each input is user-defined as either the                                                          Alarm Threshold:-15dBu to -60dBu in 3dB steps via
                                                alarm conditions for both the main and                            rotary switch
main source or auxiliary source and both
                                                auxiliary inputs. The status of the source,       Silence Detect
sources are monitored for failure, each                                                           Duration:        2 - 30 seconds in 2 second intervals &
                                                mode and alarm state are also shown on                             125 second option via rotary switch
having a remote failure alarm. In the event
                                                the front panel with LED indicators.              Detection Type: Mono or stereo, via DIP switch
of the main source dropping below a pre-
set level for a pre-determined amount of        Additionally, the RB-SD1 can be                   Silence Switch
                                                                                                  Defeat:          Disable/enable silence switching, via
time, the unit will automatically switch        programmed for specific applications                               DIP switch
through to the auxiliary signal. The silence    which can be defined on power-up of the           Remote Start:    Latched or momentary, via DIP switch
detect level is adjustable between -60dBu       unit. Contact Sonifex for further                 Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                                   220-240V, fused, 9W max
and -15dBu in 3dB steps via a 16 position       information if you have a particular
                                                                                                  Front Panel Controls and Indicators
rotary switch on the rear panel. The silence    requirement. (Refer to the handbook on the        Controls (with
interval can be adjusted between 2 seconds      website for information on current                indicators):     Source select, mode select and restore
                                                                                                  Indicator:       Program and alarm indicators for left
to 30 seconds in 2 second steps, or,            configurations).                                                   and right source for both main and
alternatively, set to 2 minutes 5 seconds                                                                          auxiliary channels
                                                The RB-SD1 has been designed to have a            Equipment Type
also via a 16 position rotary switch on the
                                                passive signal path through the main input,       RB-SD1:          Silence detection unit
rear panel. The audio outputs use stereo
                                                so if power to the unit fails, the signal input   Physical Specification
professional balanced XLR-3 male                                                                  Weight:          Nett: 1.4kg Gross: 2.0kg
                                                will still be routed through to the output.
connectors.                                                                                       Dimensions       48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x
                                                This is essential for applications such as        (Raw):           4.2cm (H) (1U)
The unit can operate in 2 modes -               installation at transmitter sites, where a        (Boxed):         53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
automatic or manual. In both modes it will      power failure to the unit should not
automatically switch over to the auxiliary      prevent the audio input signal from being
source on detecting silence. When the main      output to the transmitter.
signal is again detected it will either
return to the main
signal automatically or
manually depending
on the mode chosen.
The RB-SD1 has a
number of remote
operational features. Remote
outputs provide separate
relay contact closures for
failure of the main and
auxiliary inputs. You can also control
remotely all of the front panel switches for
source selection, mode selection and signal
Restore. You can remotely start and stop
another piece of equipment on alarm
failure and main signal Restore respectively.
Also, the longest silence time (2min 5sec)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                   13
                                                                                                                                                      AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                   R e d b ox - M a t c h i n g Co nve r t e r s
                                    RB-UL1 Single Stereo Unbalanced To Balanced Converter                                                   Audio Specification For RB-UL1
                                                                                                                                            Maximum
                                                                                           balanced XLR-3 outputs with an output            Input Level:    +28dBu
                                   The RB-UL1 is a single stereo unit for
                                                                                                                                            Input
                                   interfacing domestic or semi-professional               impedance of <50 .                               Impedance:      >10k
                                   unbalanced equipment, such as a CD player,                                                               Maximum
                                                                                           The output gain can be individually              Output Level:   +28dBu
                                   to professional balanced line levels.
                                                                                           adjusted for left and right channels by using    Output
                                                                                                                                            Impedance:      <50
                                   The two RCA unbalanced inputs have an                   pre-set potentiometers accessible through
                                                                                                                                            Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                   impedance of 10k and are routed to two                  the rear panel.                                  Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                                                            Frequency
                                                                                                                                            Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600       load,
                                                                                                                                                            ref 1kHz)
                                                                                                                                            Gain Range:     Balanced output : -15dBu to +15dBu,
                                                                                                                                                            ref -15dBu into unbalanced RCA input
                                                                                                                                            Connections
                                                                                                                                            Inputs:         2 x RCA phono (Unbalanced)
                                                                                                                                            Outputs:        2 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced)
M ATC H I N G CO N V E R T E R S




                                                                                                                                            Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                                                                            220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                                                                                            Equipment Type
                                                                                                                                            RB-UL1:         Single stereo unbalanced to balanced
                                                                                                                                                            converter
                                                                                                                                            Physical Specification
                                                                                                                                            Weight:         Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.45kg
                                                                                                                                            Dimensions
                                                                                                                                            (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                                                                                                                            (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)


                                   “   Each Redbox is tested twice
                                   by skilled audio engineers, before
                                   being carefully assembled
                                   and packed.
                                                    ”                                       RB-UL2 Dual Stereo Unbalanced To Balanced Converter

                                                                                           The RB-UL2 is a dual stereo unit for
                                                                                           interfacing domestic or semi-professional
                                                                                           unbalanced equipment to professional
                                                                                           balanced line levels.

                                                                                           All connections are on the rear panel. Four
                                                                                                                                           “     Manufactured to the highest
                                                                                                                                           standards in our UK offices... the
                                                                                                                                           Redbox range of products are "fit and
                                   Audio Specification For RB-UL2                          RCA unbalanced inputs have an impedance         forget" because you can set them up,
                                   Maximum
                                   Input Level:    +28dBu
                                                                                           of 10k and are routed to four balanced          fit them in your installation and then
                                   Input                                                   XLR-3 outputs with an output impedance          forget about them - they won't
                                   Impedance:      >10k
                                                                                           of <50 .                                        trouble you. All the Redboxes are
                                   Output
                                   Impedance:      <50
                                                                                           The output gain can be individually             screw mountable as standard and
                                   Maximum
                                   Output Level:   +28dBu                                  adjusted for left and right channels by using   are either rack-mounted or have the

                                                                                                                                                                                     ”
                                                                                           pre-set potentiometers accessible through
                                   Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output                                                      option to be rack-mounted.
                                                                                           the rear panel, allowing you to feed both
                                   Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                   Frequency                                               balanced and unbalanced equipment.
                                   Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600       load,
                                                   ref 1kHz)
                                   Gain Range:     Balanced output : -15dBu to +15dBu,
                                                   ref -15dBu into unbalanced RCA input
                                   Connections
                                   Inputs:         4 x RCA phono (Unbalanced)
                                   Outputs:        4 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced)
                                   Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                   220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                   Equipment Type
                                   RB-UL2:         Dual stereo unbalanced to balanced
                                                   converter
                                   Physical Specification
                                   Weight:         Nett: 1.05kg Gross: 1.5kg
                                   Dimensions
                                   (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                   (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




14                                                                        Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - M a t c h i n g Co nve r t e r s
 RB-UL4 Quad Stereo Unbalanced To Balanced Converter

The RB-UL4 is a 1U rack-mount quad stereo                XLR-3 outputs with an output


                                                                                                         “
unit for interfacing domestic or semi-                   impedance of <50 .                                   The RB-UL4 is a 1U rack-mount
professional unbalanced equipment to
                                                         The output gain can be individually             quad stereo unit for interfacing
professional balanced line levels.
                                                         adjusted for left and right channels            domestic or semi-professional
All connections are on the rear panel.                   by using pre-set potentiometers                 unbalanced equipment to
The eight RCA unbalanced inputs have an                  accessible through the rear panel.
                                                                                                         professional balanced
impedance of 10k and are
routed to eight balanced                                                                                 line levels.
                                                                                                                         ”




                                                                                                                                                                  M ATC H I N G CO N V E R T E R S
Audio Specification For RB-UL4
Maximum
Input Level:    +28dBu
Maximum
Output Level:   +28dBu
Input
Impedance:      >10k
Output                                                    RB-LU4 Quad Stereo Balanced To Unbalanced Converter
Impedance:      <50
Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                                         The RB-LU4 is a 1U rack-mount quad stereo       Audio Specification For RB-LU4
Frequency                                                unit for interfacing professional balanced      Maximum
Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600       load,                                                    Input Level:    +28dBu
                ref 1kHz)
                                                         line levels to domestic or semi-pro
                                                                                                         Input
Gain Range:     Balanced output : -15dBu to +15dBu,      unbalanced equipment, e.g. for connecting       Impedance
                ref -15dBu into unbalanced RCA input     a pro satellite receiver to a consumer          (XLR):          >20k     balanced bridging
Connections                                                                                              Output
                                                         hi-fi system.                                   Impedance
Inputs:         8 x RCA phono (Unbalanced)                                                               (RCA):          <50
Outputs:        8 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced)            All connections are on the rear panel.          Maximum
Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or                                                    Output Level:   +22dBu
                220-240V, fused, 6W max                  The eight balanced XLR-3 inputs have an
                                                                                                         Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
Equipment Type                                           impedance of 20k and are routed to eight
                                                                                                         Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
RB-UL4:         Quad stereo unbalanced to balanced       unbalanced RCA outputs with an output           Common
                converter                                                                                Mode Rejection: >66dB typically
                                                         impedance of <50 .
Physical Specification                                                                                   Frequency
Weight:         Nett: 1.3kg Gross: 1.9kg                 The output gain can be individually             Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600     load,
Dimensions                                                                                                               ref 1kHz)
(Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)   adjusted for left and right channels by using   Gain Range:     Unbalanced Output : -28dBu to
(Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)          pre-set potentiometers accessible through                       +15dBu, ref -15dBu into balanced XLR
                                                                                                                         input
                                                         the rear panel.                                 Connections
                                                                                                         Inputs:         8 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)
                                                         A LED power indicator on the front panel        Outputs:        8 x RCA phono (Unbalanced)
                                                         displays the power supply connection.           Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                                         220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                                                         Equipment Type
                                                                                                         RB-LU4:         Quad stereo balanced to unbalanced
                                                                                                                         converter
                                                                                                         Physical Specification
                                                                                                         Weight:         Nett: 1.3kg Gross: 1.9kg
                                                                                                         Dimensions
                                                                                                         (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
                                                                                                         (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                        15
                                                                                                                                                        AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                   R e d b ox - M a t c h i n g Co nve r t e r s
                                   Audio Specification For RB-BL2
                                                                                              RB-BL2 Single Stereo Bi-Directional Matching Converter
                                   Maximum
                                   Input Level:    +28dBu
                                   Maximum                                                   The RB-BL2 is a bi-directional stereo unit for
                                   Output Level:   +28dBu
                                                                                                                                              balanced XLR-3 outputs with an output
                                   Input                                                     interfacing domestic or semi-pro                 impedance of <50 . All connections are on
                                   Impedance                                                 unbalanced equipment to                          the rear panel.
                                   (RCA):          >10k     unbalanced
                                   Input                                                     professional balanced line
                                   Impedance                                                 levels, and vice-versa.
                                   (XLR):          >20k     balanced bridging
                                   Output                                                    The two XLR-3
                                   Impedance
                                   (RCA):          <50                                       electronically
                                   Output                                                    balanced inputs
                                   Impedance
                                   (XLR):          <50                                       have an impedance of
                                   Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output        20k bridging and are routed to two
                                   Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                             unbalanced RCA (phono) outputs with an
                                   Common                                                                                                     The output gain can be adjusted
                                                                                             output impedance of <50 .
M ATC H I N G CO N V E R T E R S




                                   Mode Rejection: >66dB typically
                                                                                                                                              for left and right channels by using pre-set
                                   Frequency
                                   Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600     load,       The two RCA unbalanced inputs have an            potentiometers accessible through the
                                                   ref 1kHz)
                                                                                             impedance of 20k and are routed to two           rear panel.
                                   Gain Range:     Unbalanced Output : -28dBu to
                                                   +15dBu, ref -15dBu into balanced XLR
                                                   input
                                                   Balanced Output : -15dBu to +15dBu,
                                                   ref -15dBu into unbalanced RCA input
                                   Connections                                                                                                Audio Specification For RB-BL4
                                   Inputs:         2 x RCA phono (Unbal), 2 x XLR 3 pin                                                       Maximum
                                                   female (Bal)                                                                               Input Level:    +28dBu
                                   Outputs:        2 x XLR 3 pin male (Bal), 2 x RCA phono                                                    Maximum
                                                   (Unbal)                                                                                    Output Level:   +28dBu
                                   Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or                                                      Input
                                                   220-240V, fused, 6W max                                                                    Impedance
                                   Equipment Type                                                                                             (RCA):          >10k     unbalanced
                                   RB-BL2:
                                                   converter
                                   Physical Specification
                                   Weight:
                                                   Single stereo bi-directional matching



                                                   Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.4kg
                                                                                             “    The output gain can be adjusted
                                                                                             for left and right channels by using
                                                                                             pre-set potentiometers accessible
                                                                                                                                              Input
                                                                                                                                              Impedance
                                                                                                                                              (XLR):
                                                                                                                                              Output
                                                                                                                                              Impedance
                                                                                                                                                              >20k     balanced bridging




                                                                                                                          ”
                                   Dimensions                                                                                                 (RCA):          <50
                                   (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)         through the rear panel.                          Output
                                   (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)                                                            Impedance
                                                                                                                                              (XLR):          <50
                                                                                                                                              Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                                                              Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                                                              Common
                                    RB-BL4 Dual Stereo Bi-Directional Matching Converter                                                      Mode Rejection: >66dB typically
                                                                                                                                              Frequency
                                                                                                                                              Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600     load,
                                   The RB-BL4 is a dual bi-directional stereo                The four RCA unbalanced inputs have an                           ref 1kHz)
                                                                                                                                              Gain Range:     Unbalanced Output : -28dBu to
                                   unit for interfacing domestic or semi-pro                 impedance of 20k and are routed to four                          +15dBu, ref -15dBu into balanced XLR
                                   unbalanced equipment to professional                      balanced XLR-3 outputs with an output                            input
                                                                                                                                                              Balanced Output : -15dBu to +15dBu,
                                   balanced line levels, and vice versa.                     impedance of <50 . All connections are on                        ref -15dBu into unbalanced RCA input
                                                                                             the rear panel.                                  Connections
                                   The four XLR-3 electronically balanced                                                                     Inputs:         4 x RCA phono (Unbal), 4 x XLR 3 pin
                                   inputs have an impedance of 20k bridging                  The output gain can be adjusted for left                         female (Bal)
                                                                                                                                              Outputs:        4 x XLR 3 pin male (Bal), 4 x RCA phono
                                   and are routed to four unbalanced RCA                     and right channels by using pre-set                              (Unbal)
                                   (phono) outputs with an output impedance                  potentiometers accessible through the            Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                                                                              220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                   of <50 .                                                  rear panel.                                      Equipment Type
                                                                                                                                              RB-BL4:         Dual stereo bi-directional matching
                                                                                                                                                              converter
                                                                                                                                              Physical Specification
                                                                                                                                              Weight:         Nett: 1.3kg Gross: 1.9kg
                                                                                                                                              Dimensions
                                                                                                                                              (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
                                                                                                                                              (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




16                                                                       Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - M a t c h i n g Co nve r t e r s
 RB-PA2 Dual Stereo RIAA Phono Amplifier




                                                                                                                                                       M ATC H I N G CO N V E R T E R S
                                              The RB-PA2 is a dual stereo RIAA equalised       Audio Specification For RB-PA2



“
                                              phono amplifier. This record player preamp       Maximum
    A dual stereo unit to interface up                                                         Input Level:    +28dBu
                                              amplifies the small signal from your pick up
to two turntables. Quality high               cartridge (either moving magnet or high
                                                                                               Input
                                                                                               Impedance:      >47k
specification components have been            output moving coil magnetic) and provides        Input
                                                                                               Sensitivity
used together with low noise, fast            the necessary RIAA equalisation required         Range:          1mV to 25mV (ref 1kHz)
acting operational amplifiers to              for vinyl records, to match it to a line input   Maximum
                                                                                               Output Level:   +28dBu
produce a superbly transparent                of your mixer, or amplifier. It uses a clean
                                                                                               Output
                                              RIAA response making it ideal for use with

             ”
                                                                                               Impedance:      <50
signal path.                                                                                   Output
                                              broadcast turntables and DJ decks and
                                                                                               Gain Range:     Adjustable 38dB to 58dB gain via 4
                                              where vinyl records are being archived to                        multi-turn pots
                                              CD for high quality transfers, or for            Crosstalk:      Better than -80dBu at 1kHz
                                                                                               Frequency
                                              converting albums to mp3.                        Response:       10Hz-15kHz (-3dB)
                                                                                               RIAA Accuracy: Within 0.5dB of RIAA curve
                                              It operates with phono cartridges with a
                                                                                               Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                              nominal output of 1mV to 25mV and has            Noise:          -77dB (CCIR Q-Pk, 20Hz-20kHz)
                                              been specifically tested to work with the        Headroom:       27dB for 3mV input
                                              Technics SL-1200™ and 1210™ range of             Dynamic Range: 90dB
                                              turntables. Quality high specification           Connections
                                                                                               Analogue
                                              components have been used together with          Inputs:         4 x RCA Phono sockets.
                                              low noise, fast acting operational amplifiers    Analogue
                                              to produce a superbly transparent signal         Outputs:        4 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced) (L & R)
                                                                                               Earth Tag:      Grounding turret tag
                                              path. Additionally, the RB-PA2 runs without
                                                                                               Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V,
                                              a rumble filter to produce a powerful bass                       or 220-240V, fused, 6W max.
                                              response.                                        Equipment Type
                                                                                               RB-PA2:         Dual stereo RIAA phono amplifier
                                              The RB-PA2 is a dual stereo unit to interface    Physical Specification
                                              up to two turntables. The inputs are phono       Weight:         Nett: 1.1kg Gross: 1.5kg
                                              connectors with Neutrik XLR connectors for       Dimensions
                                                                                               (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                              the balanced outputs, which may be wired         (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                              unbalanced if required. Output gain is
                                              individually adjustable for left and right
                                              channels in the range 35dB to 65dB by
                                              using pre-set potentiometers. Frequency
                                              response is held within 0.5dB of the RIAA
                                              curve and noise is typically better than
                                              -84dB RMS A weighted at 40dB gain.


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                             17
                                                                                                                                                        AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                   R e d b ox - M a t c h i n g Co nve r t e r s
                                    RB-LI2 Stereo Line Isolation Unit                                                                         Audio Specification For RB-LI2
                                                                                                                                              Output
                                                                                                                                              Impedance:      <150
                                   The RB-LI2 stereo line isolation unit is                  line, forming a transformer balanced             Distortion:     0.5% THD @ 40Hz, ref +17dBu output
                                   used to isolate audio signals from inter-                 distribution point.                              Common
                                                                                                                                              Mode Rejection: <64dB typically
                                   area ground hum loops, which could
                                                                                             The isolated outputs can be individually         Frequency
                                   be caused by equipment being                                                                               Response:       10Hz to 36kHz ±0.5dB
                                                                                             adjusted using pre-set potentiometers,
                                   powered by different mains power                                                                           Output
                                                                                             accessible through the rear panel. The gain      Gain Range:     -15dB to +13.5dB
                                   supplies, or different phases on the
                                                                                             range of the stereo line isolation unit is       Connections
                                   same supply.                                                                                               Inputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)
                                                                                             -15dB to +13.5dB (28.5dB).                       Isolated
                                   The input and output are connected                                                                         Outputs:        2 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced)
                                                                                             This unit is useful where audio is required      Loop Outputs:   2 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced)
                                   together through a transformer, which
                                                                                             to be driven over a relatively long length       Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V,
                                   has internal jumpers allowing the                                                                                          or 220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                                             of cable. By isolating the signal using
                                   outputs to be balanced about ground.                                                                       Equipment Type
                                                                                             transformers, ground loop currents that can
M ATC H I N G CO N V E R T E R S




                                                                                                                                              RB-LI2:         Stereo line isolation unit
                                   There is also a loop-through output, so                   be present in non-isolated signals, are          Physical Specification
                                   that the RB-LI2 can be inserted into a                    eradicated completely.                           Weight:         Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.50kg
                                                                                                                                              Dimensions
                                                                                                                                              (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                                                                                                                              (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




                                    Audio Specification For RB-PLI6                           RB-PLI6 6 Way Mono Passive Line Isolation Unit
                                    Output
                                    Impedance:      <150
                                    Distortion:     0.5% THD @ 40Hz, ref +17dBu output       The RB-PLI6 passive line isolation unit is      cable. By isolating the signal using
                                    Common                                                   used to isolate audio signals from inter-area   transformers, ground loop currents which
                                    Mode Rejection: >64dB typically
                                    Frequency                                                ground hum loops, which could be caused         can be present in non-isolated signals, are
                                    Response:       10Hz to 36kHz ±0.5dB                     by equipment being powered by different         eradicated completely.
                                    Connections
                                    Inputs:         6 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)          mains power supplies or phases on the
                                    Outputs:        6 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced)            same supply.
                                    Equipment Type
                                    RB-PLI6:        6 way mono passive line isolation unit   The input and output are connected


                                                                                                                                             “
                                    Physical Specification                                   together through a transformer, and the              The Redbox range of products
                                    Weight:         Nett: 1.5kg Gross: 1.9kg
                                                                                             unit has internal jumpers allowing the
                                    Dimensions                                                                                               are "fit and forget" because you can
                                    (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)    inputs and/or outputs to be balanced about
                                    (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                                                                             ground. The unit requires no mains power
                                                                                                                                             set them up, fit them in your
                                                                                             for operation.                                  installation and then forget about
                                                                                             This unit is useful where audio is required
                                                                                             to be driven over a relatively long length of
                                                                                                                                             them - they won't trouble you.
                                                                                                                                                                                           ”



18                                                                         Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - Au d i o D i s t r i b u t i o n A m p l i f i e r s
                                                                                                              The RB-DA6 is a 1U rack-mount high
 RB-DA6 6 Way Stereo Distribution Amplifier                                                                   performance 6 way stereo distribution
                                                                                                              amplifier for splitting a source into a
Audio Specification For RB-DA6                       Noise:           -100dB unity gain, ref +8dBu output     number of different outputs.
Maximum                                              Connections
Input Level:    +28dBu
                                                     Inputs:          2 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can
                                                                                                              The RB-DA6 has 1 stereo input and 6 stereo
Maximum
                                                                      be unbalanced)                          outputs. It can also be configured so that 1
Output Level:   +28dBu
                                                     Outputs:         12 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced, can      mono input can be distributed to 12
Frequency                                                             be unbalanced)
Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600   load,
                                                     Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or   outputs by use of a switch which is recessed
                ref 1kHz)
                                                                      220-240V, fused, 6W max                 on the front panel to prevent it being
Gain Range:     Adjustable 8dB loss to 18dB gain
                                                     Equipment Type
                (L & R adjust)                                                                                accidentally knocked.
                                                     RB-DA6:          6 way stereo distribution amplifier
Common
Mode Rejection: >66dB typically                      Physical Specification                                   The XLR-3 inputs and outputs are
Input                                                Weight:          Nett: 1.3kg Gross: 1.9kg
impedance:      >20k   bridging
                                                                                                              electronically balanced and can be wired
                                                     Dimensions
Output                                               (Raw):           48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)   unbalanced. Each output is individually
impedance:      <50                                  (Boxed):         53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                                                                                              buffered so that a short circuit on one




                                                                                                                                                                         AU D I O D I S T R I B U T I O N A M P L I F I E R S
Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                              output won’t affect the others.

                                                                                                              The left and right input gain controls
                                                                                                              (normalising) are pre-set potentiometers
                                                                                                              accessible through the front panel.

                                                                                                                                  The output gain may
                                                                                                                                    be varied from
                                                                                                                                    -8dB to 18dB which is
                                                                                                                                       useful for normalising
                                                                                                                                         consumer and
                                                                                                                                         professional signals
                                                                                                                                         to give outputs of -
                                                                                                                                         15dBu and 0dBu
                                                                                                                                         respectively.




 RB-DA6G 6 Way Stereo Distribution Amplifier With Output Gain Control

The RB-DA6G is a 1U rack-mount high
                                                      Audio Specification For RB-DA6G                         Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
performance 6 way stereo distribution                 Maximum                                                 Noise:          -88dB unity gain, ref +8dBu output
amplifier for splitting a source into a               Input Level:     +28dBu                                 Connections
                                                      Maximum
number of different outputs. It is identical          Output Level:    +28dBu
                                                                                                              Inputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can be
                                                                                                                              unbalanced)
to the RB-DA6 with the addition of                    Frequency                                               Outputs:        12 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced, can be
individual output gain adjustment, instead            Response:        20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600     load,                    unbalanced)
                                                                       ref 1kHz)
of global stereo gain adjustment.                                                                             Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                      Gain Range:      Adjustable 8dB loss to 18dB gain                       220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                       (12 adjustable pots)
                                                      Common                                                  Equipment Type
                                                      Mode Rejection: >66dB typically                         RB-DA6G:        6 way stereo distribution amplifier with
                                                      Input                                                                   output gain control
                                                      impedance:       >20k    bridging                       Physical Specification
                                                      Output                                                  Weight:         Nett: 1.3kg Gross: 1.9kg
                                                      impedance:       <50
                                                                                                              Dimensions
                                                                                                              (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                                                                                              (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                               19
                                                                                                                                                         AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                                       R e d b ox - Au d i o D i s t r i b u t i o n A m p l i f i e r s
                                                        RB-DA4x5 4 Input, 4 x 5 Output Distribution Amplifier/Mixer
AU D I O D I S T R I B U T I O N A M P L I F I E R S




                                                                                                The RB-DA4x5 is a 1U rack-mount combined       Audio Specification For RB-DA4x5



                                                       “   The RB-DA4x5 has 4 mono              distribution amplifier and mixer. It has 4     Maximum
                                                                                                                                               Input Level:    +28dBu
                                                                                                mono analogue audio inputs on female XLR
                                                       analogue audio inputs on female                                                         Maximum
                                                                                                and 4 groups of 5 outputs on 15 way D-type     Output Level:   +28dBu
                                                       XLR and 4 groups of 5 outputs on 15      connectors. Each output group has a five       Frequency       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600 load,



                                                                              ”
                                                                                                                                               Response:       ref 1kHz)
                                                       way D-type connectors.                   way front-panel DIP switch assigned to it
                                                                                                                                               Input Gain
                                                                                                which is used to select the input(s) to send   Range:          Adjustable 8dB loss to 18dB gain
                                                                                                                                                               (channel 1-4 adjust)
                                                                                                to the output group. This enables each of
                                                                                                                                               Output Gain
                                                                                                the four inputs, or a 1kHz 0dBu tone, to be    Range:          Adjustable 8dB loss to 18dB gain
                                                                                                                                                               (group 1-4 adjust)
                                                                                                mixed to the output group.
                                                                                                                                               Input
                                                                                                                                               impedance:      >20k     bridging
                                                                                                The inputs and outputs are electronically
                                                                                                                                               Output
                                                                                                balanced and can be wired unbalanced.          impedance:      <50
                                                                                                Each input has adjustable gain using a pre-    Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                                                               Noise:          -100dB unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                set potentiometer, providing a gain range of
                                                                                                                                               Common Mode
                                                                                                -8dB to +18dB. Each output is individually     Rejection:  >66dB typically
                                                                                                buffered so that a short circuit on one        Connections
                                                                                                output won't affect the others. The output     Inputs
                                                                                                                                               (4 x Mono):     4 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can be
                                                                                                gain of each group can similarly be adjusted                   unbalanced)
                                                                                                between -8dB and +18dB using pre-set           Outputs
                                                                                                                                               (20 x Mono):    4 x 15 way D-type male plug (balanced,
                                                                                                potentiometers.                                                can be unbalanced)
                                                                                                                                               Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                The DIP switch settings and gain controls                      220-240V, fused, 9W max
                                                                                                are recessed beneath a front-mounting          Equipment Type
                                                                                                                                               RB-DA4x5:       4 Input, 4 x 5 output distribution
                                                                                                screw-on cover so that settings can not be                     amplifier/mixer
                                                                                                accidently altered, for secure applications.   Physical Specification
                                                                                                                                               Weight:         Nett: 1.6kg Gross: 2.2kg
                                                                                                Four bright front-panel signal present LEDs    Dimensions
                                                                                                show the levels of either the inputs or the    (Raw):          48cm (W) x 15.8cm (D *) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                                                                                                                               (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 25.5cm (D *) x 6cm (H)
                                                                                                output groups by pressing the AUDIO            * Note that this product is deeper than standard
                                                                                                PRESENCE button. The LEDs will show green      Redboxes
                                                                                                illumination from -12db through to 0db,
                                                                                                amber from 0db through to +6db and red
                                                                                                for inputs and outputs at +6db and over.




20                                                                              Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - Au d i o D i s t r i b u t i o n A m p l i f i e r s
 Audio Specification For RB-DDA6A                           RB-DDA6A 6 Way Stereo AES/EBU Digital Distribution Amplifier
 Input
 Impedance:      110      ±20% balanced
 Output                                                    The RB-DDA6A digital distribution                    Applications include distributing audio from
 Impedance:      110      ±20% balanced
                                                           amplifier is used for distributing digital           a digital mixing desk to multiple digital
 Sample
 Freq Range:     30-100kHz (i.e. including 32kHz,          audio data in AES/EBU format, repeating              recorders, or feeding multiple studios with
                 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz
                 & 96kHz)                                  both the audio data and the status                   an output from a DAT machine.
 Signal Level:   3V/10V peak to peak min/max               information of the input whilst
                                                                                                                It can accept input sample rates in the
 Connections                                               re-normalising to standard digital
 Input:          1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female                                                                   range of 30kHz - 100kHz, and bit rates of 16,
                 (Balanced)                                audio levels.
                                                                                                                20 and 24 bit. So, it can be used for
 Outputs:        6 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male (Balanced)
 Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                           It has a single XLR-3 female AES/EBU audio           standard CD signal distribution at 16 bit
                 220-240V, fused, 6W max                   input which is distributed to 6 XLR-3 male           44.1kHz, as well as for high quality 24 bit
 Equipment Type                                            AES/EBU outputs.                                     96kHz recording.
 RB-DDA6A:       6 way stereo AES/EBU digital
                 distribution amplifier




                                                                                                                                                                           AU D I O D I S T R I B U T I O N A M P L I F I E R S
 Physical Specification
 Weight:         Nett: 0.95kg Gross: 1.4kg
 Dimensions
 (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
 (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




                                                                                                                Audio Specification For RB-DDA6S
 RB-DDA6S 6 Way Stereo S/PDIF Digital Distribution Amplifier                                                    Input
                                                                                                                Impedance:      75   ±5% unbalanced
The RB-DDA6S digital distribution amplifier                the range of 30kHz - 100kHz, and bit rates of        Output
                                                                                                                Impedance:      75   ±5% unbalanced
is similar to the RB-DDA6A except that it is               16, 20 and 24 bit.                                   Sample
used for distributing digital audio data in                                                                     Freq. Range:    30-100kHz (i.e. including 32kHz,
                                                           Uses include audio distribution at 16 bit                            44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz &
S/PDIF format.                                                                                                                  96kHz)
                                                           44.1kHz from a consumer CD player to multiple
                                                                                                                Signal Level:   Balanced min 0.5V ±20% peak to peak
It has a single S/PDIF audio input which is                digital recorders, distribution of high quality 24   Connections
distributed to 6 x S/PDIF audio outputs at                 bit 96kHz signals from digital mixing desks to       Input:          1 x S/PDIF RCA phono (unbalanced)
                                                                                                                Outputs:        6 x S/PDIF RCA phono (unbalanced)
the same level and condition as the input                  recorders and connection of the output of, say,      Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                                                220-240V, fused, 6W max
signal. It can accept input sample rates in                a DVD player to multiple studios.
                                                                                                                Equipment Type
                                                                                                                RB-DDA6S:       6 way stereo S/PDIF digital distribution
                                                                                                                                amplifier
                                                                                                                Physical Specification
                                                                                                                Weight:         Nett: 0.9kg Gross: 1.35kg
                                                                                                                Dimensions
                                                                                                                (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                                                                                                (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




 Audio Specification For RB-DDA6W                           RB-DDA6W 6 Way Word Clock Distribution Amplifier
 Input
 Impedance:      75
 Output                                                    The RB-DDA6W word clock distribution                 The units primary application is to
 Impedance:      <50
                                                           amplifier distributes a word clock BNC input         distribute a master TTL word clock source to
 Connections
 Input:          1 x BNC female                            signal to 6 word clock BNC outputs                   multiple pieces of equipment that need to
 Outputs:        6 x BNC female                                                                                 be synchronised from the master.
 Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or     re-conditioned. It is used to distribute
                 220-240V, fused, 6W max                   reference clocks for digital audio systems.
 Equipment Type
 RB-DDA6W:       6 way word clock distribution amplifier   It has a single female BNC audio
 Physical Specification                                    input which is distributed
 Weight:         Nett: 0.9kg Gross: 1.35kg
                                                           to 6 female BNC outputs.
 Dimensions
 (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
 (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                 21
                                                                                                                                                                AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                    R e d b ox - H e a d p h o n e D i s t r i b u t i o n A m p l i f i e r s
                                     RB-HD1 Stereo Headphone Amplifier

                                    The RB-HD1 is a 1U rack-mount stereo                     Audio Specification For RB-HD1                          Outputs:        2 x ¼” (6.35mm) A/B-gauge 3-pole
                                    headphone amplifier for driving up to two                Input          >20k balanced bridging                                   stereo jack sockets
                                                                                             Impedance:     (main)                                   Remote Control: 9-pin D-type socket
                                    pairs of professional stereo headphones
                                                                                             Output         Drives 150mW into 32 to                  Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                    from a single stereo or mono input. One                  Level:         600 headphones                                           220-240V, fused, 9W max
                                    headphone socket is on the front panel with              Mono Mix                                                Equipment Type
                                                                                             Input Gain                                              RB-HD1:         Stereo headphone amplifier
                                    one on the rear.                                         Range:         22dBu
                                                                                                                                                     Physical Specification
                                                                                             Max Input Level: +28dBu
                                    The main stereo input uses electronically                Volume Control: -80dB to +11dB gain
                                                                                                                                                     Weight:          Nett: 1.35kg Gross: 2.0kg
                                    balanced XLR-3 connectors on the rear                                                                            Dimensions
                                                                                             Connections                                             (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                    panel, which can be wired un-balanced. The               Main Stereo    2 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can be   (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                                                                             Inputs:        unbalanced)
                                    output volume for the headphones can be
                                                                                             Mono Mix       1 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can be
                                    controlled either by a pot situated on the               Input:         unbalanced)
HEADPHONE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS




                                    front panel or a VCA signal supplied
                                    externally via the remote connector.

                                    A mono input can be mixed into
                                    the main headphone feed, for
                                    example, for mixing in talkback
                                    to the headphones. This has an
                                    input level control via a recessed
                                    adjustable potentiometer. The mono mix
                                    input can also be controlled remotely.

                                    A stereo/mono switch is recessed on the
                                    rear panel to prevent accidental knocking.
                                    With mono selected, audio is sent to both                indicator on the front panel displays the
                                    left and right ear pieces. A LED power                   power supply connection.



                                     RB-HD2 Dual Stereo Headphone Amplifier

                                                                                             The RB-HD2 is a high performance 2-way                  The XLR-3 inputs are electronically
                                    Audio Specification For RB-HD2
                                                                                             stereo headphone distribution amplifier for             balanced and can be wired unbalanced.
                                    Input
                                    Impedance:      >20k     balanced bridging (main)        driving up to 2 pairs of professional stereo            There are two pre-set controls on the rear
                                    Max Input Level: +28dBu                                  headphones from a single stereo or mono                 panel that adjust the level of the master
                                    Input Gain                                                                                                       input signal to the outputs.
                                    Range:          -12dB to +20dB gain (pre-set pots).
                                                                                             input. A switch on the rear panel enables
                                    Output Level:   Drives 150mW into 32 to 600              the distribution of a mono signal to all four
                                                    headphones                                                                                       Each output is on a ¼” stereo jack socket
                                                                                             outputs (i.e. both earpieces of a pair of
                                    Volume                                                                                                           and is designed to drive 150mW into
                                    Controls:       -80dB to +11dB gain                      stereo headphones) via the left channel
                                                                                                                                                     32 ohm to 600 ohm stereo headphones.
                                    Connections                                              input. The stereo/mono switch is located on
                                    Main Stereo                                                                                                      The outputs are individually buffered with
                                    Input:          2 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can be   the rear panel to prevent accidental
                                                    unbalanced)
                                                                                                                                                     their own front panel volume control. A LED
                                                                                             knocking.
                                    Outputs:        2 x ¼” (6.35mm) A/B-gauge 3-pole                                                                 power indicator on the front panel displays
                                                    stereo jack sockets                                                                              the power supply connection.
                                    Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                    220-240V, fused, 9W max
                                    Equipment Type
                                    RB-HD2:         Dual stereo headphone amplifier
                                    Physical Specification
                                    Weight:          Nett: 1.35kg Gross: 2.0kg
                                    Dimensions
                                    (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                    (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




22                                                                         Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - H e a d p h o n e D i s t r i b u t i o n A m p l i f i e r s
 RB-HD6 6 Way Stereo Headphone Distribution Amplifier




                                                                                                                                                       HEADPHONE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
                                             The RB-HD6 headphone distribution               Audio Specification For RB-HD6



“    A 1U rack-mount which                   amplifier is a 1U rack-mount which              Input
                                                                                             Impedance:      >20k balanced bridging, >10k
                                             distributes stereo audio to up to 6 different
distributes stereo audio to up to                                                                            unbalanced override
                                             sets of headphones, or can be used as 6         Output Level:   Drives 150mW into 32 to 600
6 different sets of headphones,              independent headphone amplifiers, each                          headphones
                                                                                             Individual
or can be used as 6 independent              with their own input and volume control.        Volume Control: -60dB to +18dB gain
headphone amplifiers, each                   A typical application might be to provide       Max Input Level: +28dBu

with their own input and                     common headphone feeds for guests in a          Override Inputs: +3dBu for full volume at +18dB gain
                                                                                             Master Vol


                 ”
                                             radio studio, with a separately derived
volume control.                                                                              Control:        ±10dB gain
                                             feed, perhaps including talk-back, for          Connections
                                             the presenter.                                  Main Stereo
                                                                                             Inputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can be
                                                                                                             unbalanced)
                                             The main stereo input is on XLR-3               Insert Inputs/
                                             connectors on the rear panel which are          Parallel Outputs: 6 x ¼" (6.35mm) A-gauge 3-pole stereo
                                                                                                               jack sockets (unbalanced)
                                             electronically balanced and can be wired        Outputs:        6 x ¼” (6.35mm) A-gauge 3-pole stereo
                                             unbalanced. A stereo/mono input select                          jack sockets

                                             switch on the rear panel sums left and right    Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                             220-240V, fused, 9W max
                                             outputs to provide a mono feed to the           Equipment Type
                                             headphones. The unit can receive an             RB-HD6:         6 way stereo headphone distribution
                                                                                                             amplifier
                                             override audio signal via a jack socket for
                                                                                             Physical Specification
                                             each output channel. Plugging in the jack       Weight:         Nett: 1.35kg Gross: 2.0kg
                                             plug will divert the headphone output from      Dimensions
                                             the master audio signal to the audio            (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                                                                             (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                             present on the jack plug. The override
                                             audio inputs can also be individually
                                             configured as parallel outputs, by setting
                                             internal jumpers.

                                             The master volume control adjusts overall
                                             level of the 6 outputs and does not affect
                                             the level of channels using the override
                                             inputs. The master volume can be disabled
                                             by internal jumpers.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                             23
                                                                                                                                       AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                    R e d b ox - H e a d p h o n e D i s t r i b u t i o n A m p l i f i e r s
                                     RB-DHD6 Digital 6 Way Stereo Headphone Distribution Amplifier

                                                                             The RB-DHD6 digital 6 way headphone             Audio Specification For RB-DHD6
                                                                             distribution amplifier is a 1U rack-mount       Output Level:     Drives 150mW into 32 to 600
                                                                                                                                               headphones
                                                                             which receives a digital input signal, as
                                                                                                                             Dynamic
                                                                             either AES/EBU or S/PDIF and converts it to     Range:            >100dB
                                                                             6 individually buffered, jack-plug,             Input
                                                                                                                             Impedance:        110 ±20% AES/EBU
                                                                             headphone outputs, each with their own                            75 ±15% S/PDIF
                                                                             volume control.                                 Maximum
                                                                                                                             Output Level:     +12dBu unbalanced
                                                                             Useful for connection to digital mixing         Headphone
                                                                                                                             Gain Range:       -80dBu to +12dBu
                                                                             desks, digital routers and matrices, the RB-
                                                                                                                             Sample
                                                                             DHD6 connects directly to an AES/EBU or         Frequency
                                                                                                                             Range:            30kHz-100kHz
                                                                             S/PDIF output to provide the highest
                                                                                                                             Connections
HEADPHONE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS




                                                                             quality audio directly to the headphones.       Digital Inputs:   1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female,
                                                                                                                                               1 x S/PDIF RCA phono
                                                                             The input connectors consist of a single        Headphone
                                                                             balanced XLR-3 for the AES/EBU input and a      Outputs:          6 x ¼" (6.35mm) A/B-gauge 3-pole
                                                                                                                                               stereo jack sockets
                                                                             single unbalanced phono connector for the       Mains Input:      Filtered IEC, 110V-120V, or 220-240V,
                                                                             S/PDIF input.                                                     fused, 10W max
                                                                                                                             Operational Controls
                                                                             A button located on the rear panel is used      De-emphasis
                                                                                                                             On/Off:           DIP switch selection
                                                                             to select either the AES/EBU, or S/PDIF,
                                                                                                                             Digital Input
                                                                             input and de-emphasis on the output can         Select:           AES/EBU or S/PDIF, via push-switch
                                                                             be controlled via dipswitch. If de-emphasis     Equipment Type



                                    “
                                                                                                                             RB-DHD6:          Digital 6 way stereo headphone
                                        A 1U rack-mount which receives       is selected, the RB-DHD6 will decode                              distribution amplifier
                                    a digital input signal, as either        50/15µs emphasis when indicated by              Physical Specification
                                                                             certain channel status bits in the incoming     Weight:           Nett: 1.6kg Gross: 2.2kg
                                    AES/EBU or S/PDIF and converts it to
                                                                             digital audio data.                             Dimensions
                                    6 individually buffered, jack-plug,                                                      (Raw):
                                                                                                                             (Boxed):
                                                                                                                                               48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
                                                                                                                                               53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                    headphone outputs, each with their       When operating, the front panel power
                                                                             LED flashes red and amber whenever the
                                    own volume control.
                                                        ”                    unit is not synchronised to the incoming
                                                                             digital signal.




24                                                           Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - M i xe r s & S o u r ce S e l e c t o r s
                                                                                               Audio Specification For RB-SS10
 RB-SS10 10 Way Stereo Analogue Source Selector/Mixer
                                                                                               Input
                                                                                               Impedance:      20k   bridging
                                                                                               Output
The RB-SS10 10 way stereo analogue source       maximum output level of +12dBu. The            Impedance:      <50
selector/mixer is a 1U rack-mount unit that     volume control can be made to also alter       Maximum
                                                                                               Input Level:    +28dBu
produces a stereo analogue audio output         the output level of the main XLR outputs by    Maximum
from 10 selectable stereo analogue sources.     using a switch on the rear panel to            Output Level:   +28dBu
There are 10 illuminated front panel push-      enable/disable this feature.                   Frequency
                                                                                               Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600    load,
buttons, which select and indicate the                                                                         ref 1kHz)
                                                There is a designation strip on the front      Input Gain
current channel selection. The selection and
                                                panel, useful for giving the buttons a         Range:          Adjustable 8dB loss to 20dB gain
indication is also available through a                                                                         (L & R adjust).
                                                meaningful description. The strip covers the   Common
remote connector on the rear panel. To stop
                                                input gain controls so that once configured,   Mode Rejection: >66dB typically
accidental front panel selection there is a                                                    Noise:          -96dB unity gain ref +8dBu
                                                they can't easily be altered - ideal for
remote input to inhibit the front panel                                                        Max Headphone
                                                installation work.                             Output Level: +12dBu
buttons.




                                                                                                                                                        M I X E R S & S O U R C E S E L E C TO R S
                                                                                               Connections
                                                The LED on the front panel is used to
Two of the stereo inputs are on XLR so that                                                    Inputs:         4 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced, can be
                                                indicate that power is present on the unit.                    unbalanced)
you can hot-plug audio sources, e.g.                                                                           2 x 25 way D-type socket (female) (3
                                                                                                               stereo balanced channels on each)
portable recorders.
                                                                                               Outputs:        2 x XLR 3 pin male (stereo balanced,
                                                                                                               can be unbalanced)
As well as being able to act as a source
select module, the RB-SS10 can act as a
mixer, by enabling the mix mode (using the
remote input).
                                                “   There are 10 illuminated front
                                                panel push-buttons, which select
                                                and indicate the current channel
                                                                                               Remote
                                                                                               Start I/O:
                                                                                               Remote
                                                                                               Select/Switch
                                                                                               Inputs:
                                                                                                               25 way D-type plug (male)


                                                                                                               25 way D-type socket (female)



                                                           ”
                                                                                               Status Outputs: 25 way D-type socket (female)
The gain for left and right inputs can be       selection.
                                                                                               Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, 110V-120V, or 220-240V
individually adjusted by using the pre-set                                                                     switchable, fused, 6W maximum.
                                                                                               Equipment Type
potentiometers on the front panel.
                                                                                               RB-SS10:        10 way stereo analogue source
                                                                                                               selector/mixer
As well as routing the selected audio signal,
                                                                                               Physical Specifications
the unit will also route a remote signal                                                       Weight:         Net: 1.6kg   Gross: 2.2kg
input through the remote                                                                       Dimensions
connector to the                                                                               (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                                                                               (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm
selected input
source, for
starting external
audio equipment
such as a
CD player.

The front panel
headphone output
has its own volume
control, which is independent of the level
adjustment for the main outputs, and has a




RB-SS10 Flowchart.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                              25
                                                                                                                                                                  AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                             R e d b ox - M i xe r s & S o u r ce S e l e c t o r s
                                               RB-DSS10 10 Way Stereo Digital Source Selector

                                             The RB-DSS10 digital source selector is a 1U      adjustment for the main outputs, and has a               There is a designation strip on the front
                                             rack-mount which produces an AES/EBU              maximum output level of +12dBu.                          panel, useful for giving the buttons a
                                             and S/PDIF level digital audio output from                                                                 meaningful description.
                                                                                               As well as routing the selected audio signal,
                                             10 selectable AES/EBU or S/PDIF digital
                                                                                               the unit will also route a remote signal input           The LED on the front panel is used to
                                             input signals. There are 10 illuminated front
                                                                                               through the remote connector to the                      indicate that power is present on the unit.
                                             panel push-buttons, which select and
                                                                                               selected input source, for starting external             However, it also has a secondary role to
                                             indicate the current channel selection. The
                                                                                               audio equipment, such as a CD player.                    indicate whether the selected channel is
                                             selection and indication is also available
                                                                                                                                                        routing the AES/EBU (red LED) or S/PDIF
                                             through a remote connector on the
                                                                                                                                                        input (amber LED).
                                             rear panel. To stop
                                             accidental front panel
                                             selection there is a
M I X E R S & S O U R C E S E L E C TO R S




                                             remote input to inhibit
                                             the front panel
                                             buttons.

                                             The digital receivers in this
                                             unit are fully 24 bit,
                                             96kHz capable. When an
                                             input is selected from the front panel, or
                                             remotely, the unit will attempt to capture
                                             the incoming signal on either the AES/EBU
                                             or the S/PDIF signal inputs, with priority
                                             given to the AES/EBU input. If the AES/EBU
                                                                                               Audio Specification For RB-DSS10                         Audio Outputs: 1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male
                                             signal becomes locked while the S/PDIF                                                                                    1 x S/PDIF (part of 1 x 25 way D-type
                                                                                               Input           110 ±20% balanced (AES/EBU)
                                             signal is routed, the unit will automatically     Impedance:      75 ±5% unbalanced (S/PDIF)                              plug)

                                             switch to the incoming AES/EBU signal.            Output          110 ±20% balanced (AES/EBU)              Remote
                                                                                               Impedance:      75 ±5% unbalanced (S/PDIF)               Start I/O:      1 x 25 way D-type plug (male)
                                                                                                                                                        Remote
                                             Once the receiver has successfully locked to      Signal Level:   3V/10V peak to peak min/max
                                                                                                                                                        Input Select
                                                                                                               (AES/EBU)
                                             a digital input, the LED illuminates, the tally                   0.5V ±20% peak to peak (S/PDIF)          & Switch Inputs: 1 x 25 way D-type socket (female)
                                                                                                                                                        Status Outputs: 1 x 25 way D-type socket (female)
                                             is made, and the audio is routed                  Sample Freq
                                                                                               Range:          30-100kHz (i.e. including 32kHz,         Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, continuously rated
                                             simultaneously to both the digital audio                          44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz and                       85-264VAC @ 47-63Hz, max 10W
                                                                                                               96kHz), following input signal
                                             outputs and converted to analogue audio                                                                    Equipment Type
                                                                                               Bit Depth:      Up to and including 24 bits, following   RB-DSS10        10 way stereo digital source selector
                                             for monitoring on the front panel                                 input signal
                                                                                                                                                        Physical Specifications
                                             headphone socket. If the incoming audio           Max Headphone
                                                                                               Output Level: +12dBu                                     Weight:         Net: 1.6kg    Gross: 2.2kg
                                             signal is not present, the push-button LED
                                                                                               Connections                                              Dimensions
                                             and remote tally flash to indicate that the       Audio Inputs:   8 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female
                                                                                                                                                        (Raw):          48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                                                                                                                                        (Boxed):        53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm
                                             incoming digital signal is missing.                               2 x AES/EBU (part of 1 x 25 way
                                                                                                               D-type plug)
                                                                                                               10 x S/PDIF (part of 1 x 25 way
                                             The headphone output has its own volume                           D-type plug)
                                             control, which is independent of the level




                                             RB-DSS10 Flowchart.



26                                                                           Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - M i xe r s & S o u r c e S e l e c t o r s
 RB-PMX4 10 Input, 4 Output Analogue Pre-set Mixer




                                                                                                                                                         M I X E R S & S O U R C E S E L E C TO R S
                                              The RB-PMX4 is a high performance 10            Audio Specification For RB-PMX4



“    A high performance 10 mono               mono input to 4 mono output pre-set             Input
                                                                                              Impedance:       >20k    balanced bridging
                                              mixer. Each of the four outputs has a 10 way
input to 4 mono output pre-set                                                                Maximum
                                              DIP switch associated with it to select which   Input Level:     +36dBu
mixer, designed for situations                of the 10 inputs are routed to it. So, by       Frequency
                                                                                              Response:        20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dBu (600     load,
where a small mixer is needed                 altering the DIP switches, any of the input                      @ 1kHz)
for installations where it will be            sources can be mixed to any of the outputs.     Common
                                                                                              Mode Rejection: >60dBu typically
configured and then only altered              The DIP switches are enclosed by a screw-
                                                                                              Noise:           -86dBu RMS 22Hz-22kHz unity gain,
                                              on cover on the front panel so that the                          ref +8dBu
occasionally, or never altered
                                              settings can not be accidentally changed for    Output


      ”
at all.                                       secure applications.

                                              The RB-PMX4 has been designed for
                                              situations where a small mixer is needed for
                                                                                              Impedance:
                                                                                              Maximum
                                                                                              Output Level:
                                                                                              Gain Range:
                                                                                                               <50

                                                                                                               +28dBu
                                                                                                               Adjustable -8dBu to +18dBu gain.
                                                                                              Off-isolation/
                                                                                              Crosstalk:       >90dBu @ 1kHz
                                              installations where it will be configured and
                                                                                              Distortion:      <0.01% @ 1kHz, 0dBu to +26dBu
                                              then only altered occasionally, or never
                                                                                              Connections
                                              altered at all. Uses for this product are       Inputs:          10 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced, can be
                                              numerous including a four bus mini-mixer, a                      unbalanced)
                                                                                              Outputs:         4 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced, can be
                                              multiple clean-feed generator, a 4 zone                          unbalanced)
                                              mixer for pubs and clubs and a quad stereo      Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V,
                                                                                                               or 220-240V, fused, 6W maximum
                                              to mono converter to name a few.                Equipment Type
                                                                                              RB-PMX4:         10 input, 4 output analogue pre-set
                                              The XLR-3 inputs and outputs are                                 Mixer
                                              electronically balanced and can be wired        Physical Specification
                                              unbalanced. Each output is individually         Weight:          Nett: 1.6kg Gross: 2.2kg
                                              buffered so that a short circuit on one won't   Dimensions
                                                                                              (Raw):           48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)(1U)
                                              affect the others. Each input has its own       (Boxed):         53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                              gain control which is a pre-set
                                              potentiometer accessible through the front
                                              panel. This provides gain adjustment of
                                              -8dB to +18dB. This is useful for normalising
                                              consumer and professional signals to give
                                              outputs of -15dBu and 0dBu respectively.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                               27
                                                                                                                                                                         AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                             R e d b ox - M i xe r s & S o u r ce S e l e c t o r s
                                              RB-SSML1 Mic/Line Source Selector With Compressor/Limiter

                                             The RB-SSML1 is a 1U
                                             rack-mountable
                                             source selector for
                                             compressing or lim-
                                             iting an incoming
                                             microphone or
                                             stereo line signal and
                                             mixing this signal
                                             with a stereo monitor
                                             input, which can then
                                             be metered and mixed to two
                                             headphone outputs. The unit is mainly used
M I X E R S & S O U R C E S E L E C TO R S




                                             in situations where level control is required,
                                             for example in voiceover applications.

                                             The mic input consists of an independent                   have fully adjustable volume control via                 ratios of 1:1 (no compression) to :1
                                             low-noise microphone pre-amplifier for                     front panel pots, with the line input having             (limiting). A front panel BYPASS button can
                                             converting microphone level signals to a                   an additional 10dB gain increase via a                   be used, where no compression is applied.
                                             line level. There are independent switches                 switch on the rear panel for use with                    A rear-panel DIPswitch allows compression
                                             to control a high pass filter (low frequency               unbalanced equipment. The mono mic                       only to be applied to the mic input and not
                                             roll-off at 125Hz) and to provide phantom                  input is converted to a stereo signal before             the stereo line input.
                                             power at +48V to the connected                             being passed to the compressor/limiter.
                                             microphone. A preset pot on the rear panel                                                                          The metering is carried out after the
                                                                                                        The XLR-3 stereo monitor input has an                    compressor/limiter section and consists of
                                             allows adjustment of the mic gain from
                                                                                                        adjustable volume control via a back panel               two rows of 12 round LEDs showing levels
                                             36dB to 75dB.
                                                                                                        recessed pot, and has an additional 10dB                 between -17dB and +11dB. An internal
                                             A front panel switch selects between mic                   gain increase via a switch on the rear panel,            jumper allows the metering to follow either
                                             and line inputs. Both mic and line inputs                  for use with unbalanced equipment. The                   the stereo output, or the headphone
                                                                                                        audio on this input is only present on the               monitor outputs and a rear panel DIPswitch
                                             Audio Specification For RB-SSML1 (Bypass Mode)
                                                                                                        headphone outputs, and is therefore                      can disable the peak hold display.
                                             Maximum          -10dBu (mic), +28dBu (line),
                                             Input Level:     electronically balanced                   suitable as a return feed from a codec, a PC
                                             Input            20k   nominal balanced                    audio output, or similar equipment.                      The XLR-3 stereo line output can be fed
                                             Impedance:
                                                                                                                                                                 from either the mic or line input, but not
                                             Maximum          +28dBu                                    The compression ratio and threshold limits
                                             Output Level:                                                                                                       the stereo monitor input. The line output is
                                             Output           <50                                       of the compressor/limiter section are fully              electronically balanced and can be wired
                                             Impedance:                                                 adjustable via linear pots situated on the
                                             Low Frequency 125Hz @ 6dB/octave
                                                                                                                                                                 unbalanced by grounding the non-phase
                                             Roll-Off:
                                                                                                        front panel. The threshold can be set                    signal, allowing you to feed both balanced
                                             Gain Range       Adjustable 36dB to 75dB gain              between -30dBu and +20dBu. When the                      and unbalanced equipment. A pushbutton
                                             (mic):           (-80dB volume min.)                       input signal rises above the threshold level
                                             Volume Control -80dB to +6dB gain (-70dB +16dB with                                                                 switch is provided to reduce the output by
                                             (line):        additional input gain)                      a soft-knee compression is applied at the                10dB for this purpose.
                                             E.I.N:           130dB                                     selected ratio. The compressor has an attack
                                             Distortion:      <0.02% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output       time of approximately 20ms and a release                 An LED power indicator on the front panel
                                             Common Mode >66dB typically
                                             Rejection:
                                                                                                        time of approx 400ms, and can operate at                 displays the power supply connection.
                                             Phantom Power: 48V                                                                                                   Threshold   Analogue
                                                                                                                                                             Compression      Switch
                                             Frequency        20Hz to 20kHz ±0.3dB                                              Mic L.F. Filter    Mic.
                                             Response:        (600 load, ref 1kHz)                                                                Volume                                                Stereo
                                             Connections                                                   Phantom                                                                  Fixed               Output
                                                                                                          Power (48V)      Gain L.F. Filter                                          Gain
                                             Mic Input:       1 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)
                                                                                                                        Phantom In/Out
                                             Line Input:      2 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)                            On/Off
                                                                                                                                                                                            Fixed
                                             Monitor Input:   2 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)                                                                                                Gain
                                                                                                                                             Line Volume L                                       LED Level
                                                                                                                                L                                                        Jumper Meter Drivers
                                             Output:          2 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced, can be
                                                              unbalanced)                                          Fixed Gain                                       Compressor
                                             Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, 110V-120V, or 220-240V       Stereo                                                       Controls
                                                                                                          Line                               Line Volume R                               Jumper       Peak
                                                              switchable, fused, 9W maximum                                     R                                                                     Hold
                                                                                                                                                                                                     On/Off
                                             Equipment Type                                                        Fixed Gain
                                             RB-SSML1:        Mic/Line source selector with                                                  Line Volume L
                                                              compressor/limiter                                                L                                                         Volume
                                                                                                                                                                          M




                                             Physical Specification                                      Stereo    Fixed Gain                                                                       Stereo Jack
                                                                                                         Monitor                                                                                    Output
                                             Weight:          Nett: 1.3kg Gross: 2.0kg                                                       Line Volume R
                                                                                                                                R                                                                   Stereo Jack
                                                                                                                                                                                  Audio Output
                                                                                                                                                                          M




                                             Dimensions                                                                                                                                             Output
                                                                                                                   Fixed Gain                                                       Amplifier
                                             (Raw):           48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D ) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
                                             (Boxed):         53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D ) x 6cm (H)
                                                                                                        RB-SSML1 Flowchart.



28                                                                                   Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - M i c r o p h o n e A m p l i f i e r s & L i m i t e r s
  RB-MA1 Single Microphone Amplifier

The RB-MA1 consists of a low noise                Audio Specification For RB-MA1                    Gain Range:     Adjustable 36dB to 75dB gain
microphone pre-amplifier for converting           Maximum                                           Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                                  Input Level:    -10dBu
mic level signals to line level, or for driving                                                     Phantom Power: 48V
                                                  Maximum                                           Connections
long lines from microphones to mixing             Output Level:   +28dBu
                                                                                                    Input:          1 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)
equipment.                                        Low Frequency                                     Output:         1 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced, can be
                                                  Roll-Off:     125Hz @ 6dB/octave                                  unbalanced)
The connections and controls are on the           E.I.N.:         130dB                             Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
rear panel. The microphone input is an XLR-       Common                                                            220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                  Mode Rejection: >60dB typically                   Equipment Type
3 type and is electronically balanced. The        Frequency       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600 load,   RB-MA1:       Single microphone amplifier
gain for the input can be adjusted by a           Response:       ref 1kHz)                         Physical Specification
                                                  Input                                             Weight:         Nett: 0.9kg Gross: 1.35kg
recessed pre-set potentiometer which              Impedance:      2k    nominal balanced
                                                                                                    Dimensions
allows for the use of both dynamic and            Output                                            (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                                  Impedance:      <50
powered microphones.                                                                                (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




                                                                                                                                                            MICROPHONE AMPLIFIERS & LIMITERS
The line output is of an XLR-3 type and is
electronically balanced. It can be wired
unbalanced by grounding the non-phase
signal, allowing you to feed both balanced
and unbalanced equipment.

There is a switch to control a high pass filter
(low frequency roll-off at 125Hz) and to
provide phantom power at +48V to the
connected microphone.




 RB-MA2 Dual Microphone Amplifier

The RB-MA2 consists of two independent                                                              Audio Specification For RB-MA2
low-noise microphone pre-amplifiers for                                                             Maximum



                                                  “
                                                                                                    Input Level:    -10dBu
converting mic level signals to line level, or        All the Redboxes are screw
                                                                                                    Maximum
for driving long lines from microphones to        mountable as standard and are                     Output Level:   +28dBu
mixing equipment.                                 either rack-mounted or have the                   Low Frequency
                                                                                                    Roll-Off:     125Hz @ 6dB/octave
All connections and controls are on the rear
panel. The microphone inputs are XLR-3
type and are electronically balanced. The
                                                  option to be rack-mounted.
                                                                                           ”        E.I.N.:
                                                                                                    Common Mode
                                                                                                    Rejection:
                                                                                                    Frequency
                                                                                                    Response:
                                                                                                                    130dB

                                                                                                                >60dB typically

                                                                                                                    20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600      load,
input gain for each input can be adjusted         you to feed both balanced and unbalanced                          ref 1kHz)
individually by a recessed pre-set                equipment.                                        Input
potentiometer which allows for the use of                                                           Impedance:      2k    nominal balanced
                                                  For each channel there are independent            Output
both dynamic and powered microphones.                                                               Impedance:      <50
                                                  switches to control a high pass filter (low
                                                                                                    Gain Range:     Adjustable 36dB to 75dB gain
The XLR-3 line outputs are electronically         frequency roll-off at 125Hz) and to provide                       (each input)
balanced and can be wired unbalanced by           phantom power at +48V to the connected            Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
grounding the non-phase signal, allowing          microphones.                                      Phantom Power: 48V
                                                                                                    Connections
                                                                                                    Inputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced)
                                                                                                    Outputs:        2 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced, can be
                                                                                                                    unbalanced)
                                                                                                    Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                                    220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                                                    Equipment Type
                                                                                                    RB-MA2:         Dual microphone amplifier
                                                                                                    Physical Specification
                                                                                                    Weight:         Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.45kg
                                                                                                    Dimensions
                                                                                                    (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                                                                                    (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                  29
                                                                                                                                     AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                   R e d b ox - M i c r o p h o n e A m p l i f i e r s & L i m i t e r s
                                    RB-DMA2 Dual Digital Microphone Amplifier
MICROPHONE AMPLIFIERS & LIMITERS




                                                                            The RB-DMA2 consists of two independent        Audio Specification For RB-DMA2



                                   “    The unit can either be used as      low-noise microphone pre-amplifiers for        Input Level:   Max -25dBu, Min -62dBu to give FSD
                                                                            converting microphone level signals to a       Input
                                   two independent microphone                                                              Impedance:     2k    nominal
                                                                            digital AES/EBU or S/PDIF output. Individual   Input Gain
                                   amplifiers, or one mic input can be      analogue balanced line level outputs are       Range:         37dB
                                   copied to both channels of the           also produced for use, for example, to feed    Low
                                                                                                                           Frequency
                                   digital output.
                                                  ”                         talkback systems. The unit can either be
                                                                            used as two independent microphone
                                                                            amplifiers, or one mic input can be copied
                                                                            to both channels of the digital output.
                                                                                                                           Roll-off:
                                                                                                                           Signal
                                                                                                                           To Noise:
                                                                                                                           Dynamic
                                                                                                                           Range:
                                                                                                                                          125Hz @ 6dB/octave

                                                                                                                                          130dB EIN

                                                                                                                                          >110dB
                                                                                                                           Distortion
                                                                            The microphone inputs are XLR-3 type and       And Noise:     <0.01% THD + N absolute @ 1kHz
                                                                                                                           Phantom
                                                                            are electronically balanced. The input gain    Power:         48V
                                                                            for each input can be adjusted individually    Connections
                                                                            by a volume control on the front panel         Microphone
                                                                                                                           Inputs:    2 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced)
                                                                            enabling the use of dynamic and powered
                                                                            microphones and each has a LED level           Sync Inputs: 1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin female (balanced)
                                                                                                                                        1 x S/PDIF RCA phono socket,
                                                                            indicator. For each channel there are                       1 x TTL BNC female
                                                                            independent switches to control a high pass    Analogue
                                                                                                                           Outputs:       2 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced)
                                                                            filter (low frequency roll-off at 125Hz) and
                                                                                                                           Digital
                                                                            to provide phantom power at +48V to the        Outputs:       1 x AES/EBU XLR 3 pin male (balanced),
                                                                                                                                          1 x S/PDIF RCA phono socket
                                                                            connected microphones.
                                                                                                                           Mains Input: Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V,
                                                                                                                                        or 220-240V, fused, 10W max
                                                                            The RB-DMA2 has AES/EBU, S/PDIF and TTL        Equipment Type
                                                                            word clock sync inputs and has the same        RB-DMA2:       Dual digital microphone amplifier
                                                                            sync modes, bit depth selection, channel       Physical Specification
                                                                            status bit adjustment, front panel LED         Weight:        Nett: 1.6kg Gross: 2.2kg

                                                                            synchronisation and calibration routine as     Dimensions
                                                                                                                           (Raw):         48cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
                                                                            the RB-ADDA. Please refer to that product      (Boxed):       53cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                                                            for further information.




30                                                          Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - M i c r o p h o n e A m p l i f i e r s & L i m i t e r s
 RB-ML2 Stereo Microphone & Line Level Limiter




                                                                                                 Audio Specification For RB-ML2
                                                                                                 Maximum          -6dBu (mic), +28dBu (line),
                                                                                                 Input Level:     electronically balanced
                                                                                                 Input




                                                                                                                                                            MICROPHONE AMPLIFIERS & LIMITERS
                                                                                                 Impedance:       >20k    balanced bridging
                                                                                                 Input Gain
                                                                                                 Range:           Adjustable +22dB to +67dB gain (mic)
                                                                                                                  via 2 x pre-set potentiometers (L & R),
                                                                                                                  0dB gain (line)
                                                                                                 Maximum
                                                                                                 Output Level:    -18dBu (mic), +28dBu (line),
                                                                                                                  electronically balanced
                                                                                                 Output
                                                                                                 Impedance:       <50     balanced
                                                                                                 Output           Adjustable -54dB to -24dB gain (mic),
                                                                                                 Gain Range:      -8dB to +22dB gain (line), ref 0dBu
                                                                                                                  line input, gain via 2 x pre-set
                                                                                                                  potentiometers
                                                                                                 Limit Threshold: Adjustable -8dBu to +28dBu
                                                                                                 Frequency
                                                                                                 Response:        20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600        load,
                                                                                                                  ref 1kHz)
The RB-ML2 is a stereo microphone and line       threshold level control. With the limit         Noise (RMS):     <-70dB unity gain, ref +8dBu output
level limiter. The unit is mainly used where     threshold set to maximum, the input             Distortion:      < 0.02% THD + N @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu
                                                                                                                  output, threshold set at +10dBu
assistance with level control is required, for   through to output can be normalised using
                                                                                                 Common
protection of mixer inputs and to prevent        the input potentiometers. Once the unit is      Mode Rejection
                                                                                                 (Line):        >66dB typically
distortion. Ideal for news-booths, and the       acting as a buffer with gain/attenuation, the
                                                                                                 Common
input to PC workstations, it provides an         limit threshold level can be set, with the      Mode Rejection
                                                                                                 (Mic):         >86dB typically
economical level control solution.               recovery adjusted for the application. The
                                                                                                 Phantom
                                                 power LED indicates limiting by flashing.       Power:           +48V
The RB-ML2 has two electronically balanced
                                                                                                 LF Filter:       125Hz @ 6dB/octave
XLR-3 inputs, which are routed to a line         The two XLR-3 electronically balanced
amplifier, or microphone amplifier, via a        outputs can be set to either line or mic        Connections & Controls
rear push-button. The microphone                 output levels via a push-button. This allows    Analogue
                                                                                                 Inputs:          2 x XLR 3 pin female mic or line
amplifiers have independent pre-set gain         the RB-ML2 to be used in line with a line or                     switchable (balanced) (L & R)
controls, and DIP switches for a high pass       mic input on a mixer, or similar equipment.     Mic/Line
                                                                                                 Input Control:   2 x push-buttons for mic/line inputs
filter (low frequency roll-off at 125kHz) and
                                                                                                 Analogue
phantom power to provide +48V to the                                                             Outputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin male mic or line
                                                                                                                  switchable (balanced) (L & R)
connected microphones.
                                                                                                 Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                                  220-240V, fused, 6W max.
The outputs of these amplifiers are passed
                                                                                                 Mic/Line
through a VCA limiter circuit that can                                                           Output
                                                                                                 Control:         2 x push-button for mic/line outputs
operate jointly on the signals in stereo
                                                                                                 Phantom
mode, or independently in dual mono                                                              Power & LF
                                                                                                 Filter:          1 x 4-way DIP switch
mode. The rear panel mode switch changes
                                                                                                 Mono/Stereo
the unit from dual mono to stereo. Stereo                                                        Mode Select:     1 x push-button
limiting operates by limiting both left and                                                      Limit Level
                                                                                                 Threshold Set:   2 x pre-set potentiometers
right outputs if either left or right input
needs to be limited. Dual mono limiting

                                                 “
                                                                                                 Equipment Type
                                                     The unit is mainly used where
operates by limiting left and right signals                                                      RB-ML2:          Stereo microphone limiter
individually, so you can use the RB-ML2 as       assistance with level control is
two separate mono mic/line limiters.             required, for protection of mixer               Physical Specification
                                                                                                 Weight:          Nett: 1.1kg Gross: 1.5kg
                                                 inputs and to prevent
The characteristics of the limiter can be set                                                    Dimensions
via level threshold pre-sets. For each
channel there is an input gain and a
                                                 distortion.
                                                             ”                                   (Raw):
                                                                                                 (Boxed):
                                                                                                                  28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.3cm (H)
                                                                                                                  36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                  31
                                                                                                                                         AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                   R e d b ox - M i c r o p h o n e A m p l i f i e r s & L i m i t e r s
                                    RB-SL2 Twin Mono, Or Stereo, Limiter
MICROPHONE AMPLIFIERS & LIMITERS




                                                                            The RB-SL2 is a stereo, or twin independent
                                                                                                                               Audio Specification For RB-SL2



                                   “   The XLR-3 electronically             mono, VCA limiter for use in news-rooms            Maximum
                                                                            and other locations where the correct level        Input Level:    +28dBu
                                   balanced inputs and outputs                                                                 Maximum
                                                                            into recording equipment is required, but          Output Level:   +28dBu
                                   can be wired unbalanced to accept        not necessarily under the control of an            Input Gain:     Adjustable -8dB to +18dB gain
                                   an output from domestic                  engineer, for example, for overload                Limit Threshold: Adjustable -8dBu to +28dBu
                                   equipment.
                                              ”                             protection. It can also be used as an
                                                                            inexpensive main output limiter for small
                                                                            scale radio stations, hospital radio and
                                                                            student radio.
                                                                                                                               Frequency
                                                                                                                               Response:

                                                                                                                               Noise:
                                                                                                                               Distortion:
                                                                                                                                               20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600
                                                                                                                                               ref 1kHz)
                                                                                                                                                                               load,

                                                                                                                                               -100dB unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                                                               0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output,
                                                                                                                                               threshold set at +10dBu
                                                                                                                               Common Mode
                                                                            The XLR-3 electronically balanced inputs           Rejection:  >66dB typically
                                                                            and outputs can be wired unbalanced to             Input
                                                                                                                               impedance:      >20k     balanced bridging
                                                                            accept an output from domestic
                                                                                                                               Output
                                                                            equipment.                                         impedance:      <50      balanced
                                                                                                                               Connections
                                                                            For each channel there is an input gain and        Inputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced, can be
                                                                            a threshold level control. With the limit                          unbalanced)
                                                                                                                               Outputs:        2 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced, can be
                                                                            threshold set to maximum, the input                                unbalanced)
                                                                                                                               Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                            through to output can be normalised using                          220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                            the input potentiometers. Once the unit is         Equipment Type
                                                                            acting as a buffer with gain/attenuation, the      RB-SL2:         Twin mono, or stereo, limiter
                                                                            limit threshold level can be set, with the         Physical Specification
                                                                                                                               Weight:         Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.45kg
                                                                            recovery adjusted for the application. The
                                                                                                                               Dimensions
                                                                            power LED indicates limiting by flashing.          (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                                                                                                               (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                                                            The rear panel mode switch changes the
                                                                            unit from dual mono to stereo, when only
                                                                            the pre-sets for channel 1 (left) are active
                                                                            and apply to both channels. Stereo limiting
                                                                            operates by limiting both left and right
                                                                            outputs if either left or right input needs to
                                                                            be limited. Dual mono limiting operates by
                                                                            limiting left and right signals individually, so
                                                                            you can use the RB-SL2 as two separate
                                                                            mono limiters.




32                                                          Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - S t e r e o To M o n o Co nve r t e r s
                                               RB-SM1 Single Stereo To Mono Converter

                                              The RB-SM1 converts a stereo input to          Audio Specification For RB-SM1
                                              a fully buffered and balanced mono             Maximum



“
                                                                                             Input Level:    +28dBu
    The RB-SM1 converts a stereo              line output.
                                                                                             Maximum
input to a fully buffered and                 The connections, which are on the rear
                                                                                             Output Level:   +28dBu



                                 ”
                                                                                             Input
balanced mono line output.                    panel, are of an XLR-3 type. The input is      Impedance:      >20k      balanced bridging
                                              electronically balanced with an impedance      Output
                                                                                             Impedance:      <50      balanced
                                              of 20k bridging. This can be wired             Frequency
                                              unbalanced to accept an output from            Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600     load,
                                                                                                             ref 1kHz)
                                              domestic equipment.                            Gain Range:     Adjust -8dB to +18dB gain, ref. 0dB
                                                                                                             input on L and R
                                              The output is electronically balanced with     Common
                                                                                             Mode Rejection: >66dB typically
                                              an output impedance of <50 . The output
                                                                                             Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output




                                                                                                                                                      S T E R E O TO M O N O CO N V E R T E R S
                                              can be wired unbalanced by grounding the       Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                              non-phase signal, allowing you to feed both    Connections
                                                                 balanced and                Inputs:         2 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced, can
                                                                                                             be unbalanced)
                                                                    unbalanced               Output:         1 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced, can
                                                                     equipment.                              be unbalanced)
                                                                                             Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                        Output gain                          220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                                             Equipment Type
                                                                    adjustment using a
                                                                                             RB-SM1:         Single stereo to mono converter
                                                                pre-set potentiometer for
                                                                                             Physical Specification
                                              the converter allows a normalised mono         Weight:         Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.45kg
                                              output from domestic stereo equipment.         Dimensions
                                                                                             (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                              This potentiometer is accessible through       (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                              the rear panel.




 RB-SM2 Dual Stereo To Mono Converter

The RB-SM2 is a dual version of the RB-      The XLR-3 line outputs are electronically       Audio Specification For RB-SM2
SM1, consisting of two independent           balanced with an output impedance of            Maximum
                                                                                             Input Level:    +28dBu
converters which will produce two fully      <50 . The outputs can be wired
                                                                                             Maximum
buffered and balanced mono line              unbalanced by grounding the non-phase           Output Level:   +28dBu
outputs from two stereo inputs.              signal, allowing you to feed both balanced      Input
                                                                                             Impedance:      >20k     balanced bridging
                                             and unbalanced equipment.                       Output
All connections are on the rear panel.                                                       Impedance:      <50      balanced
The XLR-3 inputs are electronically          Output gain adjustment using pre-set            Frequency
balanced with an impedance of 20k            potentiometers for both converters allows a     Response:       20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB (600     load,
                                                                                                             ref 1kHz)
bridging. These can be wired                 normalised mono output from domestic            Gain Range:     Adjust -8dB to +18dB gain, ref. 0dB
unbalanced to accept an output from          stereo equipment. The potentiometers are                        input on L and R
                                                                                             Common
domestic equipment.                          accessible through the rear panel.              Mode Rejection: >66dB typically
                                                                                             Distortion:     0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                             Noise:          -100dB, unity gain, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                             Connections
                                                                                             Inputs:         4 x XLR 3 pin female (Balanced, can be
                                                                                                             unbalanced)
                                                                                             Outputs:        2 x XLR 3 pin male (Balanced, can be
                                                                                                             unbalanced)
                                                                                             Mains Input:    Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V, or
                                                                                                             220-240V, fused, 6W max
                                                                                             Equipment Type
                                                                                             RB-SM2:         Dual stereo to mono converter
                                                                                             Physical Specification
                                                                                             Weight:         Nett: 1.05kg Gross: 1.50kg
                                                                                             Dimensions
                                                                                             (Raw):          28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                                                                             (Boxed):        36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                            33
                                                                                                                                              AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


                                  R e d b ox - G e n e r a l I n t e r f a ce s
                                                                                                                                    Connections For RB-LC3
                                   RB-LC3 3 Way Light/Power Controller
                                                                                                                                    Mains Input:     Non-filtered IEC, 110V-240V auto-
                                                                                                                                                     adjusting, fused, 6W maximum

                                  The RB-LC3 is a triple output switching unit     that output will be equal to the mains input     Mains Outputs: 3 x Non-filtered IEC plugs, 1A fused
                                                                                                                                    Telephone:       2 x RJ11-4 sockets
                                  for controlling external mains indicators,       voltage used to power the unit.
                                                                                                                                    Control Inputs
                                  primarily studio status lights for                                                                & Outputs:       15 way D-type plug
                                                                                   External control of the switched mains                            Inputs: 0V- 5V DC
                                  broadcasting applications, such as On-Air,                                                                         Outputs: Open collector 20mA sink
                                                                                   outputs is via the 15 way D-type                                  capability
                                  Mic-Live and Rehearsal/Live lights. Each
                                                                                   plug connector.                                  Equipment Type
                                  output can be individually controlled by
                                                                                                                                    RB-LC3:          3 way light/power controller
                                  one of three remote inputs (pulled high, or      The telephone Line input and Handset             Physical Specification
                                  low), by a telephony input (when ringing, or     output are via two RJ11-4 type connectors.       Weight:          Nett: 1.0kg Gross: 1.45kg
                                  off-hook, or both), or a combination of two      The telephone connections are wired pin to       Dimensions
                                                                                                                                    (Raw):           28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.2cm (H)
                                  inputs (to control two outputs, e.g. for         pin from Line to Handset except when the         (Boxed):         36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)
                                  Rehearsal/Live situations). The type of          remote Ring Mute control input is asserted.
                                  control is set using the 12 way DIP switch       In this case the ring signal to the Handset     The status of the telephone line is
G E N E R A L I N T E R FAC E S




                                  (4 switches for each output, allowing 16         is muted.                                       continually monitored so that handset
                                  different settings).                                                                             ringing and off-hook conditions can be
                                                                                                                                   indicated.
                                  All connections are on
                                  the rear panel. The three                                                                        A pre-set potentiometer on the rear panel
                                  IEC outputs are                                                                                  controls the flash rate of the output when
                                  controlled by zero-                                                                              the appropriate mode is selected. Neon
                                  cross point drivers. When an                                                                     indicators on each power socket show the
                                  output is activated, the A.C. voltage level at                                                   status of the mains output.




                                                                                                                                    Audio Specification For RB-MM1
                                   RB-MM1 Mix-Minus Generator
                                                                                                                                    Maximum
                                                                                                                                    Input Level:     +28dBu

                                  Whenever programming originates from             pre-set potentiometer. To control the            Input
                                                                                                                                    Impedance:       >20k
                                  outside of the studio, or if listeners/viewers   cancellation null, 2 multi-turn                  Maximum
                                  are calling up a phone-in using telephone        potentiometers are provided, one for the LF      Output Level:    +28dBu
                                                                                                                                    Output
                                  hybrids or codecs, mix-minus feeds are           null and the other for the full-band null.       Impedance:       <50
                                  required. Most telephone lines incur delays      Additionally, a band pass filter can be          Output Gain      Adjustable -15dB to +12dB, ref 0dBu
                                                                                                                                    Range:           gain via a multi-turn pot
                                  which prohibit off-air monitoring, because       switched in and out, via a rear panel switch,
                                                                                                                                    Common
                                  the caller, or remote talent, would hear their   to condition the signal for the telephone        Mode Rejection: >60dB
                                  own voice in delay which is very                 hybrid. To use the RB-MM1 unit with full-        Band Pass
                                                                                                                                    Filter Range:    200Hz to 4kHz, 12dB/octave
                                  disconcerting. The solution is to feed a mix     band ISDN codecs, the band pass filter can
                                                                                                                                    LF Null
                                  back to the caller minus his or her own          be switched out. For stereo codecs, or           Adjustment:      Better than 40dB at 100Hz
                                  voice. Some mixing desks do not have a           conference calls, multiple RB-MM1 units can      Mix-Minus Null: Better than 40dB at 1kHz
                                                                                                                                    Frequency
                                  dedicated telco channel to generate a            be used.                                         Response:        20Hz - 22kHz ± 0.1dB
                                  clean-feed, or mix minus, so the RB-MM1                                                           Distortion:      0.01% THD @ 1kHz, ref +8dBu output
                                                                                                                                                     (C-Message weighted)
                                  can be used.
                                                                                                                                    Noise:           -90dBu unity gain +6dBu
                                  The RB-MM1 is a unit                                                                              Connections

                                  for generating a                                                                                  Analogue         2 x XLR 3 pin female
                                                                                                                                    Inputs From      (balanced) (L & R)
                                  suitable mix to                                                                                   Mixer Output:
                                  send to a                                                                                         Analogue        1 x XLR 3 pin female (balanced) (L & R)
                                                                                                                                    Input From
                                  telephone hybrid or codec. A                                                                      Telephone Fader:
                                  stereo output is taken from a mixer,                                                              Analogue
                                                                                                                                    Output To TBU: 1 x XLR 3 pin male (balanced) (L & R)
                                  together with a post fader output from the                                                        Mains Input:     Filtered IEC, switchable 110-120V,
                                  mono telephone fader on the mixer. The                                                                             or 220-240V, fused, 6W max.
                                                                                                                                    Equipment Type
                                  caller audio is removed from the station
                                                                                                                                    RB-MM1:          Mix-minus generator
                                  output so that it can be sent to the


                                                                                   “
                                                                                                                                    Physical Specification
                                  telephone line via the hybrid.                       A unit for generating a suitable             Weight:          Nett: 1.1kg Gross: 1.5kg
                                                                                   mix to send to a telephone hybrid                Dimensions
                                  Analogue audio inputs and outputs are via

                                                                                             ”
                                                                                                                                    (Raw):           28cm (W) x 10.8cm (D) x 4.3cm (H)
                                  Neutrik XLR connectors. The output level to      or codec.                                        (Boxed):         36cm (W) x 20.5cm (D) x 6cm (H)

                                  the TBU can be adjusted using a rear panel


34                                                                Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O I N T E R FAC E S


R e d b ox - G e n e r a l I n t e r f a ce s
  RB-OA3 3 Studio On-Air Switcher




                                                                                                                                                                      G E N E R A L I N T E R FAC E S
The RB-OA3 is a 1U rack-mount, unity gain             also allows for the control of a profanity           units can be connected together to switch
on-air switcher, capable of switching three           delay to be shared by all connected studios.         6 stereo pairs between up to 5 studios.
stereo pairs between three studios. Each
                                                      Each studio has the ability to offer the             The modes are configured by dip switch
studio can control the transmission path
                                                      transmission. Once offered, the transmission         configurations, on the rear of each unit. Two
together with two peripheral paths for
                                                      is fed to the other studios via the “last studio     dip switches control the unit ID and there
equipment such as a codec or hybrid and
                                                      to offer” bus. The next scheduled station can        are two switches which decide between
there is also a “Last studio to offer” bus,
                                                      then fade in the transmission and accept at          “studio” and “bus” modes. A master unit,
allowing for seamless and continuous
                                                      the appropriate time meaning the                     defined by a preset ID, conducts all
broadcast from any multi-studio radio
                                                      transmission can be continuous.                      communication between all units.
network. A “sustain” mode allows for a
sustaining system, such as a PC automation            The “sustain” mode can be used to control            Audio Specification For RB-OA3
system, to control the broadcast. Multiple            an automated studio, such as an overnight            Transmission and Peripheral Path:
RB-OA3 units can be connected together to                                                                  Relays are used for switching these specific paths
                                                      music system. In this case, station control          leading to a passive, transparent audio path.
switch more studios or more stereo pairs.             will switch to the automated system by               LSO Path:
                                                      holding the Offer button down for a number           Input Impedance:       >20k
The switching is achieved using relays,
                                                                                                           Output Impedance:      <50
except the “last studio to offer” which is            of seconds, pre-determined by a calibration
                                                                                                           Gain Range:            Unity gain
switched by an analogue switch. The                   routine. This will select the sustaining studio,     Frequency Response: 20Hz to 20kHz ±0.1dB
transmission path is switched using latching          set as studio three, which will immediately          Common Mode
                                                      offer control back to all remaining studios.         Rejection:             < -66dB typically
relays. This means that if there is a power
                                                                                                           Distortion:            0.01%THD @ 1kHz
failure to the unit, the transmission path will       Any studio can then accept to resume
                                                                                                           Noise:                 -100dB unity gain, ref +8dBu
remain selected.                                      orthodox broadcasting.                               Mix Audio Transformer Specifications:
                                                                                                           Common Mode
All studios are connected using 25 way                The RB-OA3 can be expanded to switch                 Rejection:             < -64dB @ 10kHz
D-types for electronically balanced audio             between up to 5 studios or up to 6 stereo            Distortion:            0.5% THD ref 17dBu @ 40Hz

signals and control is achieved using 15 way          pairs by connecting a multiple of units              Bandwidth:             ±0.5dBu 10Hz to 36kHz
                                                                                                           Connections
D-types, connecting to an external control            together via RJ45 serial connections. With
                                                                                                           Studio I/O:            3 x 25 way D type socket (female)
unit such as the Sonifex S2-MTBS mixer                the addition of a single unit, expansion in          Transmission I/O:      1 x 25 way D type socket (female)
control panel. A transmission mix                     “studio” mode allows for 2 additional studios        Dump/Delay Control: 1 x 9 way D type plug (male)
connection is included to mix audio which             to take control of the transmission path and         Studio Control:        3 x 15 way D type sockets
                                                                                                                                  (female)
is generic to all studios into the                    additional equipment. If the expansion is
                                                                                                           LSO Expansion Port:    1 x 9 way D type socket (female)
transmission path. This could be used for             made in “bus” mode, then three additional            Mix Input:             1 x 9 way D type socket (female)
jingles or adverts for example. The RB-OA3            stereo channels can be added. 4 x RB-OA3             Serial Ports:          2 x RJ45
                                                                                                           Mains Input:           Filtered IEC, 110V-120V, or
                                                                                                                                  220-240V switchable, fused,
                                                                                                                                  9W maximum
                                                                                                           Equipment Type
RB-0A3                                               RB-0A3a
                                                                                                           RB-OA3:                3 Studio on-air switcher
                                                                                                           Physical Specification
                                                                                                           Weight:                Nett: 1.9kg Gross: 2.5kg
                                                                                                           Dimensions (Raw):      48cm (W) x 15.8cm (D ) x 4.2cm
                                                                                                                                  (H) (1U)
RB-0A3b                                              RB-0A3c                                               (Boxed):               53cm (W) x 25.5cm (D ) x 6cm (H)
         Adding RB-OA3a allows 3 stereo channels to be switched between 5 studios.
         Adding RB-OA3b allows 6 stereo channels to be switched between 3 studios.
         Adding RB-OA3a , RB-OA3b and RB-OA3c allows 6 stereo channels to be switched between 5 studios.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                            35
                                                                                                                      AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S


                                       N e t - L o g N e t wo r k Au d i o L o g g e r
                                                                                                                               Radio Broadcast Logging
                                                                                                                               Where logging is required by the
                                                                                                                               authorities, Net-Log provides a perfect,
                                                                                                                               simple to use, elegant solution providing
                                                                                                                               playback of requested recordings within
                                                                                                                               seconds. But even if logging isn’t regulatory,
                                                                                                                               Net-Log can still deliver audio to the
                                                                                                                               desktop of anyone at a radio station – you
                                                                                                                               don’t need to go to the racks-room, or
                                                                                                                               central technical area to play out a
                                       The Net-Log is a new way to              Net-Log Network Audio Logger                   recording previously made. So it has the
                                       record and play audio.                                                                  following advantages :
                                       The Net-Log overcomes the              The Sonifex Net-Log is a 4 channel audio
                                                                              logger which can record weeks of                 • From their desktop, the sales team can
                                       inherent unreliability of PCs for      programming on a large internal hard-disk.         check to make sure that advertising was
AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S




                                       long-term recording by                 The unit was designed as dedicated                 played on time and can create audio files
                                       providing a dedicated hardware         hardware for reliability reasons, i.e. there’s     to email to customers.
                                       recording platform that uses a         no PC motherboard in this machine.               • Program controllers can snoop on their
                                                                              Although PC based systems are great for            presenters, checking performance and
                                       simple network connection for          playback, they generally aren’t robust             checking that scheduled music
                                       audio playback. Playback               enough for continuous recording 24/7/365.          was played.
                                       software on a network                  The Net-Log was designed from the ground         • Station managers can check up on their

                                       connected PC streams the               up to offer :                                      competition and compare it with the
                                                                                                                                 sound of their own station.
                                       audio to the desktop where it          • High reliability for continuous operation.
                                                                                                                               • The production team have much easier
                                       can be played out or saved             • High quality audio (mpeg compressed).
                                                                              • Compatibility with existing broadcast
                                                                                                                                 access to recorded audio from past radio
                                       as a file.                               & Windows based systems (bwf files can
                                                                                                                                 shows for the preparation of future stings
                                                                                                                                 & trailers.
                                                                                be saved).
                                                                              • Automatic operation with very simple           Net-Log records in mpeg layer 2, the
                                                                                to use software.

                                       “    The Sonifex Net-Log is a 4                                                         standard for radio broadcasting, so that you
                                                                              All audio created by Net-Log is Windows          can be sure that audio files created using
                                       channel audio logger which can
                                                                              Media PlayerTM compatible so files can be        Net-Log are compatible with almost every
                                       record weeks of programming on                                                          mpeg based automation system available.
                                                                              emailed to colleagues and customers

                                                               ”
                                       a large internal hard-disk.            and played out on any PC with a
                                                                              sound system.
                                                                                                                               Additionally .broadcast wave format (bwf )
                                                                                                                               files are supported as standard, ensuring
                                                                                                                               tight integration with your playout
                                                                                                                               systems.

                                                                                                                               Key Features of Net-Log
                                                                                                                               • Dedicated reliable multi-channel
                                                                                                                                 recording hardware.
                                                                                                                               • Easy to use Windows™ remote operation
                                                                                                                                 for playback, archiving, streaming and
                                                                                                                                 configuration.
                                                                                                                               • Independently configurable channel
                                                                                                                                 pairs to record at different sample rates,
                                                                                                                                 different bit rates and in mono or stereo.
                                                                                                                               • Recording duration configuration of the
                                                                              There are many applications for Net-Log,           channels to suit your needs, e.g.
                                                                              from radio stations recording their                2 channels of low quality logging for 6
                                                                              broadcasts for regulatory purposes, to small       months together with two channels of
                                                                              call centres, law firms and security               high quality logging for 1 week, on one
                                                                              companies using them for monitoring. Net-          machine.
                                                                              Logs have been installed in court rooms &        • Record inputs can be controlled
                                                                              police interview rooms for audio                   remotely, e.g. snoop recording from mic-
                                                                              surveillance and, when combined with the           live output of a mixer.
                                                                              D:Scribe transcription system, offer a cost      • Automated voice recording - each
                                                                              saving desk-top based logging & filing             channel can start and stop recording
                                                                              system for audio & transcripts.                    automatically by setting audio threshold


36                                                            Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S


N e t - L o g N e t wo r k Au d i o L o g g e r
                                                   levels, which means that it can be used     2 stereo, or 4 mono audio streams which
                                                   for voice controlled systems and            are encoded in mpeg layer 2 format and
                                                   telephony recording.                        written to a large internal IDE hard disk
                                               •   Up to 250,000 recordings per channel        drive. The size of the drive is continuously
                                                   can be made.                                being increased as technology improves
                                               •   Each Net-Log has its own IP address, so a   and Net-Log can support sizes up to
                                                   number of machines can be installed on      2048GB. Contact sales@sonifex.co.uk for
                                                   the same network.                           current drive sizes installed.
                                               •   Fail-safe alarm indicators and remotes.
                                                                                               Net-Log has 2 serial ports on 9 pin
                                               •   Password protection and security access
                                                                                               D-types which are used to program the IP
                                                   rights to system.
                                                                                               address of the machine and to upload
                                               "   Support for hard disk sizes up to 2048GB.
                                                                                               new software. Additionally, there is a
                                               "   Recordings can be made using optional
                                                                                               15 pin D-type connector used for remote
                                                   G.729 algorithm, allowing longer
                                                                                               input recording control and for alarm
                                                   recordings and lower network traffic.




                                                                                                                                                 AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S
                                                                                               outputs (hard disk failure and archiving
                                                   G.729 audio quality is comparable to
                                                                                               warning).
                                                   MPEG L2 at 32kbits/sec when used to
                                                   record/playback speech.                     A 10Mbps RJ45 network port is used to
                                               "   Recording on Net-Log can be controlled      connect Net-Log to your PC network and


“    The Net-Log is initially
configured and controlled by
Net-Log-Win software which is a
                                                   serially by AMX, Crestron and Televic
                                                   board room controllers.
                                                                                               audio is streamed using TCP/IP. Audio can
                                                                                               be streamed simultaneously to one, or
                                                                                               many, PCs, as well as simultaneously
                                               Hardware Description                            archiving audio data to an IP server
suite of three applications which
                                               Net-Log is a 1U rack-mount unit which has       automatically in the background. All the
run under MS Windows                           4 mono record inputs on 3 pin XLR sockets       Net-Log configurations and operational
98/ME/NT/2000/XP™.
                         ”                     with potentiometer gain controls and LED
                                               level indicators for each input. These accept
                                                                                               features are controlled from a connected
                                                                                               PC using the Net-Log-Win software.




                                                                                               Net-Log-Win Software
  Net-Log-Win Software                       5 stream licence, up to 5 different people        There are 3 PC applications used to
  & Licensing
                                             can stream from each of the 3 Net-Logs, i.e.      configure and control the Net-Log :
  The Net-Log is initially configured and
                                             15 separate streams, provided that your
  controlled by Net-Log-Win software which                                                     • Net-Util - A utility mainly used to initially
                                             network infrastructure can allow for this.
  is a suite of three applications which run                                                     configure the Net-Log and solve
                                             Additionally, this is a buy once licence - we
  under MS Windows 98/ME/NT/2000/XP™.                                                            connection problems.
                                             don’t ask you to re-buy it each year !
  The software is sold either as a two                                                         • Net-Log-Win - This is the application used
  stream, or a five stream licence. This     Net-Log licensing operates by you                   on a day to day basis to control recording
  means that each Net-Log on a network       providing us with a licence code which              and playback.
  can simultaneously support either 2, or 5 appears in a licence window within Net-            • Auto-Archive - This is used to auto-
  simultaneous connections to it for         Log-Win. Once we’ve verified the                    matically archive/backup files to an
  playback or archiving. Note that you don’t authenticity of your order, we send you an          IP server.
  need to buy a licence for each Net-Log if  authentication code which you enter into
  they are on the same network - if you      the licence window to licence your Net-
  have a number of Net-Logs on a single      Log. If you don’t have a licence code, the
  network, you only need to purchase a       Net-Log will continue recording but access
  single set of licences, e.g. if you have 3 to the recordings will be denied after 3
  Net-Logs and buy a single Net-Log-Win05 days.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                       37
                                                                                                                               AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S


                                       N e t - L o g -Wi n S o f t w a r e




                                       Net-Util Screen.
                                                                                                                                        Manual Record Screen.
                                       Net-Util Application                         Net-Log-Win Application
                                       The Net-Util program connects to a Net-Log   There are 4 main screens in Net-Log-Win
                                       unit via a serial (COM) port using the       which control and configure the connected
                                       supplied serial cable, and is used to :      Net-Log(s) : Recording, Playback, Archiving
AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S




                                                                                    and Options. Access to these screens can be
                                       • Define the IP address of the connected
                                                                                    password protected and users can be
                                         Net-Log.
                                                                                    configured either to View or Edit each
                                       • Upload network settings.
                                                                                    screen. In the top part of the screen, a drop
                                       • Monitor status messages.
                                                                                    down list allows you to select which Net-
                                       • Upload new firmware into the Net-Log.
                                                                                    Log you wish to connect to and the alarm
                                                                                    states are also shown.
                                                                                                                                        Program Record Screen.
                                                                                    The Options screen is the place where you
                                                                                    configure the settings of the connected

                                       “  Each channel, or pair of
                                       channels, can record independently
                                       and can be configured with different
                                                                                    Net-Log. The Options Archive screen in Net-
                                                                                    Log-Win is used to configure the IP address
                                                                                    and directory of the archiving destination


                                                               ”
                                       sample and bit rates.                        and also to define archives to be written
                                                                                    either as the cuts were recorded, or in files
                                                                                    of a certain duration, e.g. hourly.

                                                                                    Recording
                                                                                    Unlike normal hard-disk recording systems
                                                                                    which stop when the disk is full, on reaching
                                                                                    the “end” of the recording data space Net-          Options Record Screen.
                                                                                    Log begins to overwrite the oldest
                                                                                    recordings, meaning that you always have            • Using a remote input on the 15 way
                                                                                    access to the last recordings made, up to             D-type connector.
                                                                                    the size of the hard-disk. Additionally, it         • Automatically on voice/sound level, ideal
                                                                                    allows simultaneous recording and                     for recording telephone conversations,
                                                                                    playback, so that you don’t have to stop the          configured in the Options Record screen.
                                                                                    unit recording in order to search and play.         • By AMX, Crestron and Televic board room
                                                                                    Each channel can be given a service name              controllers, via an RS232 serial
                                                                                    for reference when searching for audio.               connection. The controllers are mainly
                                                                                                                                          used in meeting rooms and allowing Net-
                                                                                    Recording can be controlled in 5 different ways :
                                                                                                                                          Log to more easily be used for recording
                                                                                    • Using on-screen buttons in the Manual
                                                                                                                                          in this environment.
                                                                                      Record screen.
                                                                                    • Using the Program Record screen to start          In the event of needing to record directly
                                                                                      & stop recording at different times, using        from the Net-Log, there is an emergency
                                                                                      up to 20 programs. Programs can be                Record Control on the front panel of
                                                                                      saved to disk.                                    the machine.




38                                                                  Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S


N e t - L o g -Wi n S o f t w a r e
                                                 Archiving


“   The Net-Log overcomes the
inherent unreliability of PCs for
long-term recording by providing a
                                                 You can use the Archiving function to
                                                 automatically create long-term backups
                                                 of the recordings by streaming audio to
                                                 a separate server disk for archival
dedicated hardware recording                     purposes.
platform that uses a simple network
                                                 For each recorded channel, you can
connection for audio playback.
                                      ”          define an IP address and directory to
                                                 save files to and Net-Log can create files
                                                 on that directory either in the same way
                                                                                               Play Stream Screen.
                                                 that they are recorded, or in files of a
Net-Log-Win Playback
                                                 certain length, e.g. of 1 hour duration.
Net-Log-Win software for MS-Windows™
98/ME/NT/2000/XP is used to listen to audio      The Net-Log Auto-Archive utility is run
recorded at a previous time and date, or for     on the server that you are archiving to. It




                                                                                                                               AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S
copying audio to a file, e.g. to email to a      has the following features :
client or colleague.
                                                 • Simultaneous connection to multiple
In the Play screens, simply select a Net-Log       Net-Logs.
and the required channel service name and        • Automatic log-in, archive and log-out
a list of all the recordings made are              process.
displayed, sorted by recorded date and           • Status display of Net-Logs on-screen
time. There are 4 ways to play audio :             in an easy to understand format.
                                                                                               Play Download Screen.
                                                 • Status reports, error reports and
• Using the Play Stream screen, selected
                                                   archive alarm information can be
  audio is played out on your PC sound
                                                   emailed automatically at regular
  system within seconds.
                                                   intervals.
• Using the Play Download screen, you can        • Can be used to check the status of
  select a recording's date, time and              Net-Logs even when archiving is not
  duration and a file is downloaded from           used or required.
  the Net-Log and created on your local PC.      Note that Archiving uses a licence stream.
  You can then use separate applications to
  email the audio file, edit it, or save it to
                                                  New
  CD, or DVD. Files can be saved as .mp2,
                                                  When downloading audio from Net-Log
  .mp3 or linear .wav.
                                                  you can now download in .mp3 and linear      Play File Screen.
• Using the Play Program screen, you can          formats, as well as the native .mp2.
  select a number of recordings, made at          Audio data is converted on-the-fly as
  the same time over a number of days of          you download.
  the week and save them off to a single
  directory, e.g. for storing commercials
  from a particular customer. Files can be
  saved as .mp2, .mp3 or linear .wav.

• Using the Play File screen, you can open
  any previously saved audio file for
  playback. You can also play .mp3 and
  linear .wav files this way.
                                                                                               Play Program Screen.
Additionally, a separate free player is
available within Net-Log-Win to play any
audio file created from a Net-Log.




                                                                                               Net-Log-Win Free File Player.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                     39
                                                                                                                                                              AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S


                                       N e t - L o g N e t wo r k Au d i o L o g g e r
                                        Technical Specification For Net-Log




                                        Audio Specification                                                                                Rear Panel Connections, Controls and Indicators
                                        Input Impedance:                                     >10k balanced.                                Analogue Inputs:                                     4 x XLR 3 pin socket.
                                        Maximum Input Level:                                 +20dB.                                        Input Level Controls:                                4 x Rotary pre-set potentiometers.
                                        Distortion:                                          <0.1% @ 1kHz + 16dBu.                         Network:                                             RJ45 and BNC 10Mbps ethernet.
                                        Signal to Noise Ratio:                               90 dB RMS A wtd. 22kHz bandwidth.             Network Status LEDs:                                 Rx, Tx, link and collision.
                                        Wow and Flutter:                                     Unmeasurable.                                 RS232:                                               2 x 9 way D-type plug.
                                        Phase Error at 10kHz:                                Unmeasurable.                                 Alarm Outputs and Remote Inputs:                     15 way D-type plug.
                                        Please note that the audio specification of the play output depends on the soundcard that          Power:                                               IEC Power plug, 95-265 VAC, 47-63Hz.
                                        you have installed on your PC. Net-Log is a recording device and has no audio output of
AU D I O LO G G I N G M AC H I N E S




                                        its own.




                                        Controls and Indicators
                                        Front Panel Controls:                                Record control to instantly start recording
                                        Front Panel Power Indicator:                         Power LED (blue)
                                        Front Panel Alarm Indicators:                        2 x Alarm LEDs, disk drive alarm LED (red), archive alarm LED (red)
                                        Front Panel Level Indicators:                        4 x Analogue input level LED, 1 for each channel (green, orange, red)
                                        Rear Panel Network Indicators:                       4 x LEDs, receive (RX), transmit (TX), link and collision LEDs


                                        Additional Information
                                        Sample Rates:                                        16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz and 48kHz
                                        Audio Format:                                        Mpeg layer 2 with bit-rates as below and G.729 low bit rate
                                        Recording Types:                                     Mono, dual mono, stereo
                                        Hard Disk Capacity:                                  A minimum hard-disk size of 200GB is fitted.
                                                                                             Due to the rapidly changing nature of disk capacities,
                                                                                             the hard-disk size you buy may be larger than this
                                        PC Soundcard Needed:                                 Any windows compatible soundcard that can play
                                                                                             PCM (.wav) audio files


                                        Equipment Type
                                        Net-Log-01                                           Net-Log 4 channel audio logger, with large hard disk
                                                                                             (contact sales@sonifex.co.uk for current sizes available)
                                        Net-Log-Win01                                        Net-Log Windows™ software - 2 stream licence
                                        Net-Log-Win05                                        Net-Log Windows™ software - 5 stream licence
                                        Net-Log-UPS01                                        1U rack-mount UPS for use with Net-Log
                                        Net-Log-G729                                         G.729 software licence for one Net-Log (up to 4 mono channels).


                                        Physical Specification
                                        External Dimensions:                                 1U 19" rack x 220mm deep 48cm (W) x 22cm (D) x 4.2cm (H) (1U)
                                        Weight:                                              2.5kg


                                                                                                                                             Record Duration                                                (kbit/sec)        Days Hours
                                                                                                                                             The table right shows the approximate                                   8        1156     6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    16         578     3
                                                                                                                                             record capacity at different bit-rates for                             24         385    10
                                                                                                                                             one mono channel on a 100GB hard                                       32         289     1
                                                                                                                                             disk. For 4 mono channels, divide the                                  40         231     6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    48         192    17
                                                                                                                                             figures by 4.                                                          56         165     4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    64         144    12
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    80         115    15
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    96          96     8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   112          82    14
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   128          72     6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 * 144          64     5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   160          57    19
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   192          48     4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 * 224          41     7
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 * 256          36     3
                                                                                                                                             Note : Each pair of channels can be given a different               * 320          28    21
                                                                                                                                             bit-rate and * indicates bit-rates for stereo channels only.        * 384          24     2




40                                                                           Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O T R A N S C I P T I O N S YS T E M S


D:Scribe - Standalone
                                                                                                          The audio controls for D:Scribe Standalone are
                                                                                                          the same as for the Client & Server version. A
                                                                                                          foot-pedal is supplied as standard with this
                                                                                                          package which controls the Play/Pause,
                                                                                                          Forward & Rewind buttons.

D:Scribe transcription systems                               D:Scribe Standalone                          The online spell-checker is available and
consist of two products -                                                                                 12 user defined function keys can be used to
                                                                                                          enter repetitive material such as names, places
D:Scribe Standalone is a                                                                                  and recurring events. The recorded time &
package of PC transcription                                                                               date (if transcribing Net-Log audio files) and
software together with a                                                                                  the current time & date are also available.
3 pedal foot-controller, for                                D:Scribe Standalone is a package of PC        Whilst transcribing, the date and time can
simple, fast and effective                                  transcription software together with a 3      be edited to show the actual recorded time,
transcription of pre-recorded




                                                                                                                                                                  AU D I O T R A N S C R I P T I O N S YS T E M S
                                                            pedal foot-controller, for simple, fast and   to allow transcription events to tie in with
                                                            effective transcription of pre-recorded       the time of recording. A positional Mark can
audio files.                                                audio files.                                  also be added as a reference, either
D:Scribe Client & Server                                    D:Scribe Standalone is the perfect
                                                                                                          anywhere within the file, or to mark
                                                                                                          temporarily where you've got up to with a
software can be used where                                  transcription package to use for quick,
                                                                                                          transcription in case of interruption.
you are recording using                                     simple voice-to-text conversion which can
                                                            be used either with its own text editor, or   Finished transcripts can be simply emailed
multiple Net-Logs and you                                   which can “float” on top of another           by clicking the on-screen email button,
want a database system                                      application, such as MS Word™.                which runs your standard email client to
to store, retrieve and                                      D:Scribe Standalone has all the
                                                                                                          send the text file.

transcribe audio.                                           transcription features of the full Client &   D:Scribe Standalone operates with all MS
                                                            Server version, but doesn’t have the          Windows Media Player™ standard file types :
                                                            management database structure for             broadcast .wav, .wav, .aif, .aifc, .aiff, .asf, .asx,
                                                            multiple clients.                             .wax, .wma, .wmv, .wvx, .wmp, .wmx, .avi,
                                                                                                          .mpeg, .mpg, .m1v, .mp2, .mp3, .mpa, .mpe,
                                                                                                          .mpv2 and .m3u, .mpv2, .m3u and .wma.
                                                                                                          Transcriptions can be made directly from
                                                                                                          audio CDs (CDA) provided the CD-ROM is
                                                                                                          fast enough.

                                                                                                          MPEG, AVI and WMV video formats are also
                                                                                                          supported, allowing you to watch and
                                                                                                          transcribe video footage from an in-built
                                                                                                          video window.
D:Scribe Standalone “On-Top” Screen.
                                                                                                          Built-in Recorder
 DS-UP2 D:Scribe Standalone V1.0 to V2.0 Upgrade Features                                                 D:Scribe Standalone has a built-in audio
                                                                                                          recording screen, capable of recording to
 The V2.0 software has a host of new                        • CD Ripper can optionally rip in             compressed MP3 or linear WAV files from
 features, including dongle based licencing                   WMA format.                                 any of the recordings sources of your
 and the following:                                         • Support for USB footpedal.                  soundcard including Line-In and
                                                            • Start Bar caption can optionally display    Microphone.
 • DVD/VOB playback with a Video Panel                        Play Position, Recorded Time or Time
                                                                                                          The recording screen can be used to record
   to the left of transcript space.                           Remaining
                                                                                                          audio files using manual start and stop,
 • New trackbar allows start and                            • Play Speed – fast, normal, slow with
                                                                                                          auto-start recordings using levels (VOX),
   stop marks.                                                constant pitch and many more features.
                                                                                                          and also auto-split recordings ranging from
                                                                                                          30 seconds to 1 hour each.

                                                                                                          Transfer Audio CDs
                                                                                                          D:Scribe Standalone has a built-in audio CD
                                                                                                          ripping capability. This allows pre-recorded
                                                                                                          audio CDs to be transferred to your PC as
                                                                                                          compressed MP3 or linear WAV files for
  For more details visit our website at www.sonifex.co.uk
                                                                                                          playback and transcription.


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                        41
                                                                                                                                           AU D I O T R A N S C I P T I O N S YS T E M S


                                                  D : S c r i b e - C l i e n t & S e r ve r
                                                   D:Scribe Client & Server




                                                  D:Scribe Client and Server is a database
                                                  system which can be used to categorise,
                                                  transcribe and then file audio recordings
                                                  with their transcripts. Applications include
                                                  transcriptions for police interviews, law
                                                  courts, solicitors offices & council meetings.

                                                  D:Scribe Client and Server operates
AU D I O T R A N S C R I P T I O N S YS T E M S




                                                  seamlessly with the Sonifex Net-Log audio
                                                  logger. Audio recorded on one or more
                                                  Net-Logs can be archived to a defined
                                                  server IP address where audio files can be
                                                  stored and logged. The audio files auto-
                                                  matically appear in the database structure
                                                  of D:Scribe Server with the recorded time        D:Scribe Client Transcription Screen.
                                                  and date available. Additionally, recording
                                                                                                   and made available to the attached Clients.         There are also volume & playback speed
                                                  and archiving on the Net-Logs can be
                                                                                                   Audio files are automatically linked to the         controls. The Play/Pause, Forward & Rewind
                                                  controlled from D:Scribe Server.
                                                                                                   transcriptions allowing you to                      buttons can be controlled with the optional
                                                  Organisational Efficiency - Link                 systematically arrange and classify the             DS-FPS3 or DS-FPU3 foot-pedals.
                                                  Audio & Text Files Automatically                 stored information.
                                                  D:Scribe Client and Server is a software
                                                  suite which runs under Microsoft
                                                                                                   Foot-Controlled Playback &
                                                                                                   Function Key Text Insertion
                                                  SQL2000™ on MS Windows 2000 Server™.
                                                                                                   Standard audio controls for transcription
                                                  It provides an environment where pre-
                                                                                                   include Play, Pause, (Fast) Forward and
                                                  recorded audio files can be categorised,
                                                                                                   Rewind by defined amounts. Holding the
                                                  searched and then transcribed and is ideal
                                                                                                   Rewind and Fast-Forward buttons makes
                                                  for environments where you have multiple
                                                                                                   them decrement and increment faster
                                                  channels of audio recordings which need
                                                                                                   depending on your settings. Previous and
                                                  to be transcribed by many people
                                                                                                   Next buttons allow you to go to the
                                                  on a network.
                                                                                                   previous and next recordings respectively,
                                                  Recordings are stored in the D:Scribe            which is useful where a long session has
                                                  Server software where they are categorised       been captured over a number of recordings.




                                                                                                                                                       D:Scribe Client User Defined Function Keys.

                                                                                                                                                       The transcription window has a spell
                                                                                                                                                       checker and 12 user defined function keys
                                                                                                                                                       can be used to enter repetitive material
                                                                                                                                                       such as names, places and recurring events.
                                                                                                                                                       The recorded time & date and the current
                                                                                                                                                       time & date are also available.

                                                                                                                                                       D:Scribe Server contains auto-archive and
                                                                                                                                                       auto-delete facilities so that you can define
                                                                                                                                                       how long recorded audio files & scripts are
                                                                                                                                                       stored on the server, e.g. files can be
                                                                                                                                                       automatically removed after 30 days,
                                                  DS-FPS3 D:Scribe Foot-Pedal.                                                                         eliminating an administration task.


42                                                                                Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
AU D I O T R A N S C I P T I O N S YS T E M S


D : S c r i b e - C l i e n t & S e r ve r & M e n t o r Ti m e S e r ve r
Quick & Simple Searching For                                     and transcribe it). You can then use either
                                                                                                                        Mentor Time-Server
Audio or Text From Your Desktop                                  the software controls, or the optional foot-
The D:Scribe Client allows you to search for                     pedal, to begin transcription, in a dedicated
recorded audio by recorded Net-Log,                              text window. Once transcription is finished,          Mentor Time-Server
recorded channel (which could be a                               the text is available and is linked to the            The Mentor Time-Server is software which
particular microphone in a court, a channel                      audio file. It can then easily be referenced,         runs on a Windows 95/98/2000/XP or
on a recorded radio frequency, or a                              emailed or exported. You can globally                 Windows NT Server PC and synchronises a
particular meeting room) or by recorded                          search transcriptions for text, refining the          number of Windows 95/98/2000/XP, or NT
time and date. Once you find the audio that                      audio files that you search, by Net-Log,              Workstation client machines, or Net-Logs to
you wish to transcribe, you can take                             recording day, channel, time and date, or             its time.
"ownership" of it (which will notify other                       script status (new, audio only, text only,
Clients that you are working on it, if they try                  audio & text, or open).




                                                                                                                                                                           AU D I O T R A N S C R I P T I O N S YS T E M S
                                                                                                                       Mentor Time Software Server Screen.

                                                                                                                        Equipment Type Mentor
                                                                                                                        MTS-5      Mentor Time-Server 5 client licence
                                                                                                                        MTS-25     Mentor Time-Server 25 client licence
                                                                                                                        MTS-100    Mentor Time-Server 100 client licence
                                                                                                                        MTS-500    Mentor Time-Server 500 client licence
                                                                                                                        GPS-1      Mentor GPS Receiver


D:Scribe Client Search Screen.
                                                                                                                       GPS-1 Mentor GPS Receiver
                                                                                                                       The “line of site” GPS-1 antenna receives an
 Technical Specification                                                                                               accurate time signal and converts it to
                                                                                                                       RS232 data which Mentor Server can read
  Minimum System Requirements
  D:Scribe Server:          Pentium 3 800MHz, 512Mb RAM.
                                                                                                                       and distribute to the clients.
                            Disk space required depends on how long archived audio is kept (and bitrates used)
                            MS Windows 2000™, XP Pro™
                            MS SQL 2000™
  D:Scribe Client:          Pentium 3 800MHz, 256Mb RAM
                            Windows 2000™, XP Pro™
  D:Scribe Standalone:      Pentium 3 800MHz, 128Mb RAM
                            Windows 2000™, XP Home™, XP Pro™

  Equipment Type D:Scribe Client & Server
  DS-SVR:                   D:Scribe Server licence (note this needs MS SQL 2000™ to operate)
  DS-CL01:                  D:Scribe Client licence - 1 client licence
  DS-CL05:                  D:Scribe Client licence - 5 client licence
  DS-CL10:                  D:Scribe Client licence - 10 client licence
  DS-CL25:                  D:Scribe Client licence - 25 client licence
  DS-FPS3:                  D:Scribe foot-pedal, 3 pedal version with 9 pin serial connector
                                                                                                                       GPS-1 Mentor GPS receiver, connects to PC RS232.
  DS-FPU3:                  D:Scribe foot-pedal, 3 pedal version with USB connector

  Equipment Type D:Scribe Standalone
  DS-STS3:                  D:Scribe Standalone with DS-FPS3 foot-pedal, 3 pedal version with 9 pin serial connector
  DS-STU3:                  D:Scribe Standalone with DS-FPU3 foot-pedal, 3 pedal version with USB connector
  DS-ST01                   D:Scribe Standalone licence - 1 user licence
  DS-ST05                   D:Scribe Standalone licence - 5 user licence
  DS-ST25                   D:Scribe Standalone licence - 25 user licence
  DS-ST100                  D:Scribe Standalone licence - 100 user licence

  Licencing and Dongles
  D:Scribe uses USB dongles to unlock the full
  features and functionality of the software. The
  software can be used for demonstration and
  evaluation purposes without a dongle, but with
  limited functionality. When using D:Scribe software
  without a dongle, a screen reminding you of the
  limited functionality will be shown periodically. See
  our website at www.sonifex.co.uk/dscribe for further
  details regarding the D:Scribe software.                       D:Scribe Standalone Dongle.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                 43
                                                                                                                                                M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                             S 2 - D i g i t a l I / O A n a l o g u e R a d i o B r o a d c a s t M i xe r
                                                                          S2 is a new breed of radio
                                                                          broadcast mixer. Using
                                                                          the latest technology
                                                                          components, S2 offers
                                                                          digital audio quality with
                                                                          analogue reliability in a
                                                                          modular format. S2 has
                             both digital and analogue input channels, together with simultaneous
                             analogue and digital outputs.
                             Following on from the Sovereign range of audio mixers, S2 combines all
                             the features needed of a radio broadcast mixer in a stylish, flush-
                             mounting chassis : a wide range of input and output channels, PFL/cue,
                             fader-start operation of equipment, automatic monitor muting on mic-
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S




                             live, light controlling remote outputs, optional EQ on input modules,
                             gram amp input options and 2 main audio buses, allowing you to
                             broadcast on the PRG bus while recording on the AUD bus, with bus
                             output selection on each module.


                              Innovative Design                                  Superb Audio Quality and Unquestionable Reliability

                             • The S2 chassis is available in 5 module         • The S2 uses the latest Crystal                           XLR Neutrik connectors used are an
                               width sections, allowing 5, 10, 15, 20, 25        semiconductor technology to allow                        industry standard.
                               and 30 module width mixers. This means            input and output of digital audio signals            •   The use of VCAs controlled by the
                               S2 can be used for small newsrooms or             up to 24 bit, 96kHz sample rate.                         faders ensures tight stereo tracking
                               large on-air situations.                        • The analogue signal paths use low noise                  and eliminates mechanical and
                             • Modular "pop-up" input and output                 circuitry to provide superb audio                        electronic noise.
                               channels means that the mixer can be              performance well capable of satisfying               •   S2 has a separate 2U power supply
                               maintained simply and quickly. Hot-               radio listeners worldwide.                               providing regulated, ripple-free power to
                               swappable input channels can be                 • The high reliability and build quality of                the mixer. There is also an optional
                               individually removed and repaired whilst          S2 minimises the chance of failure,                      switcher to control 2 power supplies
                               still on-air.                                     avoiding lost air-time. Each module is                   providing redundancy.
                             • The angle of the meterbridge can be               individually checked twice before being              •   High quality stainless steel is used for the
                               varied and set for best viewing position.         assembled into the finished chassis and                  chassis and screws to prevent corrosion
                             • Any module can be in any position so              the whole unit is tested before shipping.                in high humidity environments.
                               that customising the mixer for your own         • ALPS long throw 100mm faders give a                  •   Each channel is metal coated internally
                               purposes is easy.                                 smooth, repeatable response and the                      to provide exceptional EMC screening.
                             • Large back-lit buttons allow you to see
                               the status of the mixer at all times.
                             • The fitted rear panel hides all cable
                               connections but can be simply unclipped
                               and reclipped for maintenance.
                             • The modular design of the desk gives you
                               the flexibility to expand it at a later date.
                               You can even add another S2 mixer and
                               link them together with a bus connector
                               cable to allow for split desk
                               configurations.




                                                                               Radio Broadcast Mixer Using S2-25 Chassis and Script Space.



44                                                           Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


S2 - Input Channels
There is a wide choice of input                    signal can be heard via headphones and/or
                                                                                                      S2-PG S2 Penny & Giles
channels for the S2 mixer.                         loudspeakers. The button lights green when
                                                   CUE/PFL is active and a jumper option is
                                                                                                      Conductive Plastic Fader
Each channel has a number                          available to cancel the CUE/PFL selection
of common features :                               when the fader is raised. This button works
                                                   with both a momentary and latched
Assigning an Input Channel to
                                                   operation - if held down, the selection is
an Output Bus - Switches at the top of the
                                                   cancelled on release, otherwise the button is
channel are used to select the output group
                                                   alternate action.
routing, to either Program, Audition, or both
output busses. Selecting the PGM and/or AUD        Fader Start & ON Button Control - The ON          The input and output channels of an S2
buttons routes the channel audio to the PGM        button works in conjunction with the 100mm        mixer can optionally be fitted with high
and/or AUD mix busses. The buttons                 long-throw carbon fader and is used to            quality Penny & Giles faders.
illuminate green to indicate the routing status.   control channel remotes (e.g. starting a CD
                                                   player), routing and timers, etc. When unlit,




                                                                                                                                                M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - I N P U T C H A N N E L S
Changing the Input Level - Coarse gain is
                                                   the channel is off. Flashing red indicates that
set using pre-set potentiometers on the
                                                   the channel has been selected to ON but not
channel circuit board (see page 54 for gain
                                                   routed to either PGM or AUD. Steady red
ranges) which allow unbalanced inputs to
                                                   indicates that the channel is ON and "armed",
be used on mono and stereo line inputs.
                                                   ready for the fader to be raised. Raising the
The front panel TRIM control allows fine
                                                   fader changes the illumination to green
gain of ±12dB.
                                                   indicating that the channel is live.
Changing the Signal Pan, or Balance - The          Alternatively, with the button unlit the fader
BAL/PAN control is used on mono channels           may be raised and the channel can be
to pan the mono input signal in the stereo         operated simply by selecting ON. The
image and on stereo channels to balance            illumination in this case toggles between
the stereo image.                                  unlit (channel OFF) and green (channel ON).

CUE/PFL (Pre Fade Listen) - Selecting the          Scribble Pad - A scribble pad is provided at
CUE/PFL button routes the pre-fader input          the bottom of the channel for user labelling
signal to the monitoring system where the          of the channel function.


 S2-CMM Mic/Mic Channel

The mic/mic input channel is a dual mono
microphone input with a button switch to
select either Mic 1 or Mic 2.

Each Mic input has jumper settable
                                                   “    Equalisation is fitted as standard
                                                   on this channel and is enabled by
                                                   the EQ button, providing 10dB cut
phantom power available at +48V and a              and boost at HF (6.5kHz) and

                                                                ”
high pass filter to remove low frequency
                                                   LF (100Hz).
rumbles. When enabled, the LF response of
the microphone is rolled off at 125kHz, 6dB
                                                   for hooking up an outboard effects unit to
per octave. If the Mic input is used for the
                                                   be used with the microphone.
presenter's mic it can also become the
talkback mic.                                      There are logic remote input controls for
                                                   Mic Cough muting and Reverse Talkback,
Equalisation is fitted as standard on this
                                                   together with two separate output controls
channel and is enabled by the EQ button,
                                                   for Mic Cue lights, which can be momentary
providing 10dB cut and boost at HF (6.5kHz)
                                                   or latching.
and LF (100Hz).
                                                   The remote outputs on the 9 way D-type
The BAL/PAN control operates as follows :
                                                   plug are fed from NPN opto-isolators.
Full anti-clockwise pans the signal to the
left and increases the signal by 3dB (right        Both Mic inputs have a jumper selectable
channel reduces by 70dB); full clockwise           output to facilitate either Control Room
pans the signal to the right and increases         speaker or Studio speaker muting and the
the signal by 3dB (left channel reduces            channel can also be used to control either
by 70dB).                                          one of two separate timer displays.

A balanced line level insert send and return       Gold plated Neutrik XLR connectors are            S2-CMM Mic/Mic Channel
is available for the Mic input. This is useful     used for the audio inputs and outputs.            and Rear.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                      45
                                                                                                                                                                                                       M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                                                         S2 - Input Channels
                                                                                                     S2-CML Mic/Line Channel

                                                                                                   The mic/line input channel is a mono input                                         In addition the Line input can be configured
                                                                                                   with a button switch to select either Mic or                                       with all the features of the Mic input when
                                                                                                   Mono Line.                                                                         used as a Mic input with an external
                                                                                                                                                                                      microphone amplifier, e.g. for monitor
                                                                                                   For the Mic input, phantom power at +48V
                                                                                                                                                                                      muting purposes.
                                                                                                   can be configured. The Mic input has a
                                                                                                   jumper selectable high pass filter to remove                                       Gold plated Neutrik XLR connectors are
                                                                                                   low frequency rumbles.                                                             used for the audio inputs and outputs.

                                                                                                   If the Mic input is used for the presenter's
                                                                                                   mic it can also become the talkback mic.
                                                                                                   The talkback function will be retained when
                                                                                                   the channel input is switched to Line.
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - I N P U T C H A N N E L S




                                                                                                   Equalisation is fitted as standard on this
                                                                                                   channel and is enabled by the EQ button,
                                                                                                   providing 10dB cut and boost at HF (6.5kHz)
                                                                                                                                                                                      “     The ON button works in
                                                                                                                                                                                      conjunction with the 100mm long-
                                                                                                                                                                                      throw carbon fader and
                                                                                                   and LF (100Hz).                                                                    is used to control channel remotes
                                                                                                   A balanced line level insert send and return
                                                                                                                                                                                      (e.g. starting a CD player), routing
                                                                                                   is available for the Mic input for the                                             and timers, etc. When unlit, the
                                                                                                   insertion of an effects, or voice, processor                                       channel is off. Flashing red indicates
                                                                                                   into the mic channel. The send and return is                                       that the channel has been selected to
                                                                                                   disabled in Line mode.                                                             ON but not routed to either PGM or
                                                                                                   There are logic remote input controls for                                          AUD. Steady red indicates that the
                                                                                                   Mic Cough muting and Reverse Talkback.                                             channel is ON and "armed", ready for
                                                                                                   There are output controls for Mic Cue lights                                       the fader to be raised. Raising the
                                                                                                   and separate line remote start/stop controls
                                                                                                                                                                                      fader changes the illumination to
                                                                                                   by fader or ON button. Both latching and
                                                                                                   momentary contacts are catered for.                                                green indicating that the channel is
                                                                                                                                                                                      live. Alternatively, with the button
                                                                                                   The remote outputs on the 9 way D-type
                                                                                                   plug are fed from NPN opto-isolators.
                                                                                                                                                                                      unlit the fader may be raised and the
                                                                                                                                                                                      channel can be operated simply by
                                                                                                   The Mic input provides a jumper selectable
                                                                                                                                                                                      selecting ON. The illumination in this
                                                                                                   output to facilitate either Control Room
                                                                                                   speaker or Studio speaker muting and the
                                                                                                                                                                                      case toggles between unlit (channel
                                                                                                   channel can also be used to control either
                                                                                                   one of two separate timer displays.
                                                                                                                                                                                      OFF) and green (channel ON).
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        ”
                                                                                                                                                                                                                PGM AUD PFL C/FEED T/B
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Mutes




                                                                                                                                                                                                   Routing      L R L R L R 1 2 1 2
                                                                                                                        48v     Mic           Insert                          Trim          VCA                                                  To left
                                                                                                                                Gain                                                                                                             Pgm output
                                                                                                        Mic
                                                                                                                                       Line                           EQ
                                                                                                                        48v     Line                    HF/LF                        PAN                  PFL                                    To right
                                                                                                        Line                    Trim                     EQ                                                                                      Pgm output
                                                                                                        Mic 2
                                                                                                                                                                                            VCA
                                                                                                        Inse RT                                                                                   Fader
                                                                                                        Send
                                                                                                                                                        CPU                                                                                      To timer
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Bus
                                                                                                        Inse RT
                                                                                                        Return
                                                                                                                                                       PGM      Aud    Mic       EQ        Cue    ON
                                                                                                        Mic cue light                                                  Line                PFL                                                   To meter
                                                                                                                          Line remotes                                                                                                           Select
                                                                                                        Cough/rev t/b
                                                                                                                              T/b enable



                                                                                                   S2-CMM Mic/Mic Channel and S2-CML Mic/Line Channel.




                                                         S2-CML Mic/Line Channel
                                                         and Rear.



46                                                                                 Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


S2 - Input Channels
 S2-CS Dual Stereo Line Channel
 S2-CSE Dual Stereo Line Channel with EQ

The S2-CS dual stereo line channel has two       There are separate logic remote output
balanced stereo inputs on Neutrik XLR            controls for both of the two inputs providing
connectors.                                      start/stop functions by fader, or ON button.
                                                 Remotes, etc, are triggered when the fader is
The INP 1/INP 2 button selects which input
                                                 up and the channel ON button shows green.
is routed through the channel. The button is
                                                 The start function can be configured to be
illuminated in red to indicate when Input 2
                                                 either momentary (500mS) or latched for
is selected. The operation of the button is
                                                 each input. The remote outputs on the 9 way
inhibited when the channel is "live".
                                                 D-type plug are fed from NPN opto-isolators.

                                                 Continuous momentary start can be
                                                 enabled such that when the fader is up and




                                                                                                                                                  M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - I N P U T C H A N N E L S
                                                 the channel is on, each press of the ON
                                                 button triggers a momentary start.

                                                 Two remote pins can also be configured for
                                                 general use as either inputs, outputs,
                                                 latching, or momentary and active high or
                                                 low. Uses for this include channel live
                                                 indication or specific channel function
                                                 remote control.

                                                 The BAL/PAN control adjusts the stereo
                                                 balance in the following manner : Full
                                                 anti-clockwise shifts the signal to the left
                                                 and increases the signal by 6dB (right
                                                 channel reduces by 6dB); full clockwise shifts
                                                 the signal to the right and increases the
                                                 signal by 6dB (left channel reduces
                                                 by 6dB).

                                                 The 100mm VCA fader provides unity gain
                                                 when fully open. The channel input signal is
                                                 routed to the outputs whenever the fader is
                                                 open, the ON button is selected and either or
                                                 both of the routing buttons are selected.

                                                 The S2-CSE channel is the dual stereo line
                                                 channel as above but fitted with equal-
                                                 isation, providing 10dB cut and boost
                                                 at HF (6.5kHz) and LF (100Hz). The EQ button
                                                 places the equalisation in and out of the
                                                 signal path. The button is illuminated in
                                                 yellow when the EQ is active.
                                                                                                  S2-CSG Stereo Line & Gram Channel and S2-CSGE
                                                 The channel can be used to control either        Stereo Line & Gram Channel with EQ and Rear.
                                                 one of two separate timer displays.


                                                                                                  The channel is used for connecting a
                                                  S2-CSG Stereo Line & Gram                       turntable or record deck. The GRAM inputs
                                                  Channel                                         have RIAA equalisation suitable for
                                                  S2-CSGE Stereo Line & Gram                      magnetic pick-up cartridges.
                                                  Channel with EQ
                                                                                                  Selecting the LINE/GRAM button switches
                                                 The S2-CSG channel is the dual stereo line       the channel input between Stereo Line and
                                                 channel fitted with an RIAA input amplifier on   RIAA . The button is illuminated in red to
                                                 the second input. The balanced stereo line       indicate when Gram (RIAA) is selected. The
S2-CS Dual Stereo Line Channel and S2-CSE Dual   input is on Neutrik XLR connectors and the       operation of the button is inhibited when
Stereo Line Channel with EQ and Rear.            unbalanced RIAA stereo input on phonos.          the channel is "live".


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                        47
                                                                                                                                                                 M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                                                         S2 - Input Channels
                                                         There are separate logic remote output
                                                                                                           S2-CDS Digital Dual
                                                         controls for both of the two inputs
                                                                                                           Stereo Channel
                                                         providing start/stop functions by fader, or
                                                         ON button. Remotes, etc, are triggered          The digital dual stereo channel has two 24-
                                                         when the fader is up and the channel ON         bit 96kHz digital inputs with an INP 1/INP 2
                                                         button shows green. The start function can      button switch to select between them. The
                                                         be configured to be either momentary            button is illuminated in red to indicate
                                                         (500mS) or latched for each input.              when Input 2 is selected. The operation of
                                                         The remote outputs on the 9 way D-type          the button is inhibited when the channel
                                                         plug are fed from NPN opto-isolators.           is "live".
                                                         Continuous momentary start can be               Either input can be configured to be
                                                         enabled such that when the fader is up and      balanced AES/EBU on standard XLR, or
                                                         the channel is on, each press of the ON         S/PDIF on phono sockets, selected by
                                                         button triggers a momentary start.              internal jumpers.
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - I N P U T C H A N N E L S




                                                         Two remote pins can also be configured for      An additional jumper option can be used to
                                                         general use as either inputs, outputs,          decode emphasis when indicated by certain
                                                         latching, or momentary and active high or       status bits in the incoming data stream.
                                                         low. Uses for this include channel live
                                                         indication or specific channel function         The digital signals are converted to
                                                         remote control.                                 analogue and from this point the channel
                                                                                                         functions are the same as the S2-CS Dual
                                                         The BAL/PAN control adjusts the stereo
                                                                                                         Stereo Line channel with the addition that
                                                         balance in the following manner :
                                                                                                         when the ON button flashes green, it means
                                                         Full anti-clockwise shifts the signal to the
                                                                                                         that there is no valid digital input.
                                                         left and increases the signal by 6dB (right
                                                         channel reduces by 6dB); full clockwise
                                                         shifts the signal to the right and increases
                                                         the signal by 6dB (left channel reduces
                                                         by 6dB).
                                                         The 100mm VCA fader provides unity gain
                                                         when fully open. The channel input signal is
                                                                                                         “   Switches at the top of the
                                                                                                         channel are used to select the output
                                                                                                         group routing, to either Program,
                                                         routed to the outputs whenever the fader is     Audition, or both output busses.
                                                         open, the ON button is selected and either      Selecting the PGM and/or AUD
                                                         or both of the routing buttons are selected.    buttons routes the channel audio to
                                                         The S2-CSGE channel is the stereo line &        the PGM and/or AUD mix busses.
                                                         gram channel as above but fitted with           The buttons illuminate green to

                                                                                                                                          ”
                                                         equalisation, providing 10dB cut and boost      indicate the routing status.
                                                         at HF (6.5kHz) and LF (100Hz). The EQ
                                                         button places the equalisation in and out of
                                                         the signal path. The button is illuminated in
                                                         yellow when the EQ is active.
                                                                                                           S2-CDSE Digital Dual Stereo
                                                         The channel can be used to control either         Channel with EQ
                                                         one of two separate timer displays.
                                                                                                         This channel is the digital dual stereo
                                                                                                         channel as above but fitted with
                                                                                                         equalisation.

                                                                                                         The HF and LF controls are used to adjust
                                                                                                         the equalisation of the signal. The HF
                                                                                                         control boosts and cuts the signal by 10dB
                                                                                                         at 6.5kHz. The LF control boosts and cuts
                                                                                                         the signal by 10dB at 100Hz. The EQ button
                                                                                                         places the equalisation in and out of the
                                                                                                         signal path and is illuminated yellow when
                                                                                                         the EQ is active.

                                                                                                         Both S2-CDS and S2-CDSE channels can be
                                                                                                         used to control either one of two separate     S2-CDS Digital Dual Stereo Channel and S2-CDSE
                                                                                                         timer displays.                                Digital Dual Stereo Channel with EQ and Rear.



48                                                                                       Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


S2 - Input Channels
                                                                                                connectors. The channel is intended for use
  S2-C6SS 6 Way Stereo Source
                                                                                                where a remote stereo source, such as
  Select Channel with EQ
                                                                                                another studio connected via ISDN, requires
The 6 way stereo line source select channel                                                     a stereo cleanfeed return. The cleanfeed is
has 6 balanced stereo inputs on a 25 way                                                        generated by the mix-minus method from
D-type connector selectable by a 6 way                                                          either the PGM or AUD outputs, depending
mechanical interlocking switch bank,                                                            on the routing selection.
numbered 1 - 6. A depressed button                                                              Selecting the CUE/PFL & T/B button routes
indicates the selected input.                                                                   the pre-fader input signal to the monitoring
The switch bank also controls 6 sets of                                                         system where the signal can be heard via
remote outputs allowing each source to have                                                     headphones and/or loudspeakers. In
a set of start/stop remotes. The remote starts                                                  addition, talkback is routed to the cleanfeed
can be set as momentary or latching.                                                            output. This enables the presenter/technical
                                                                                                operator to communicate with the remote
Continuous momentary start can also be




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - I N P U T C H A N N E L S
                                                                                                source prior to going live to air. PFL can be
enabled such that when the fader is up and                                                      automatically disabled when the fader is
the channel is on, each press of the ON                                                         opened.
button triggers a momentary start.
                                                                                                The outputs on this channel can be
The channel is fitted with EQ as standard                                                       configured by jumper settings as a mono
and other functions are similar to the                                                          sum of mix-minus on the left channel and
S2-CSE Dual Stereo channel with EQ.                                                             continuous talkback on the right channel
The HF and LF controls are used to adjust                                                       (for some ISDN codecs and hybrid
the equalisation of the signal. The HF                                                          applications).
control boosts and cuts the signal by 10dB                                                      The fader, or ON button, control a logic
at 6.5kHz. The LF control boosts and cuts                                                       remote output function. The remote
the signal by 10dB at 100Hz. The EQ button                                                      function can be configured to be either
places the equalisation in and out of the                                                       momentary or latched. The remote outputs
signal path and is illuminated yellow when                                                      on the 9 way D-type plug are fed from NPN
the EQ is active.                                                                               opto-isolators.
The channel can be used to control either                                                       Continuous momentary start can be
one of two separate timer displays.                                                             enabled such that when the fader is up and
                                                                                                the channel is on, each press of the ON
                                                                                                button triggers a momentary start.
  S2-CSMM Stereo Mix
  Minus Channel                                                                                 Two remote pins can also be configured for
                                                                                                general use as either inputs, outputs, latch-
The stereo mix-minus channel has one                                                            ing, or momentary and active high or low.
balanced stereo line level input and a                                                          Uses for this include channel live indication
balanced stereo mix-minus output, on XLR                                                        or specific channel function remote control.


                                                                                                                                     PGM AUD PFL C/FEED T/B
                                                                                                                                                              Mutes




                                                                                                                        Routing      L R L R L R 1 2 1 2
                                         Left                                                                                                                         To S2-OMC &
  Input 1                                Trim                                      EQ      TRIM          VCA                                                          S2-OMS CPU
  Line Left                                          LINE 1/2
                                         Right                     HF/LF
                                                                                                  BAL                          PFL
                                         Trim                       EQ
  Input 1
  Line Right                                                                                             VCA
                                         Left
  Input 2                                Trim                                                         Fader
  Line Left                                                        CPU
                                         Right
  Input 2                                Trim
  Line Right
                                                                PGM        Aud   Inp 1   EQ     Cue     On
                                                                                 inp 2          PFL
         Input 2   A   1
           RIAA        3
                       2                                        C / Feed                 Null
         Option    B
                                                                Left                                                                                                  From PGM
  Input 1                  AES/SPDIF                                                                                                                                  Output L
                                                                C / Feed                 Null
                                   1
                             2




  AES/EBU                                                       Right
                             3




  Input 2                  AES/SPDIF Input                                                                                                                            From PGM
                                                     D/A
                                   1
                             2




  AES/EBU                            Select                                                                                                                           Output R
                                                                           Stereo Mix-Minus Version
                             3




         Input 1 A     1
                       3
          SPDIF B      2
                                                                 6 x Stereo
         Input 2                                                                     6 way Input             Left Input Amp
                                 Digital Input Version           Bal Inputs         And Remote
  Input 1 remotes                                                                  Output Selector           Right Input Amp
                                                                 6 x Remote
  Input 2 remotes                                                Start/Stop
                                                                         Stereo Selector Version
                                                                                                                                                                                    S2-C6SS 6 Way Stereo Source   S2-CSMM Stereo Mix
S2-CSG Stereo Line With Gram (S2-CSGE with EQ), S2-CS Dual Stereo (S2-CSE with EQ), S2-CDS Digital Dual                                                                             Select Channel With EQ        Minus Channel
Stereo (S2-CDSE with EQ), S2-CSMM Stereo Mix Minus and S2-C6SS Stereo Source Select.                                                                                                and Rear.                     and Rear.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                                                                             49
                                                                                                                                                                                            M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                                                         S2 - Input Channels
                                                                                                     Selecting the PGM and/or AUD buttons                                    operator, to communicate with the caller
                                                                                                     routes the channel audio output to the PGM                              prior to putting the caller live to air. PFL can
                                                                                                     and/or AUD mix busses. Selecting the PGM                                be automatically disabled when the fader
                                                                                                     button also routes the PGM main output via                              is opened.
                                                                                                     the mix minus system to the cleanfeed
                                                                                                                                                                             There is a logic remote output to place the
                                                                                                     output. Selecting the AUD button routes the
                                                                                                                                                                             hybrid "on hold" by using the LINE HOLD
                                                                                                     AUD main output to the mix minus system.
                                                                                                                                                                             button. The remote output on the 9 way D-
                                                                                                     The mix minus is derived from the PGM
                                                                                                                                                                             type plug is fed from an NPN opto-isolator
                                                                                                     output when selecting both PGM and AUD.
                                                                                                                                                                             and it can be made momentary or latching.
                                                                                                     Equalisation is fitted as standard on this
                                                                                                                                                                             Selecting the PGM and/or AUD buttons
                                                                                                     channel and operates in the same was as on
                                                                                                                                                                             routes the channel audio output to the
                                                                                                     the S2-CSE channel.
                                                                                                                                                                             PGM and/or AUD mix busses. The buttons
                                                                                                     The channel can be used to control either                               are illuminated in green to indicate the
                                                                                                     one of two separate timer displays.                                     routing status. Changing the status of the
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - I N P U T C H A N N E L S




                                                                                                                                                                             PGM button is inhibited when the channel
                                                                                                                                                                             is "live".


                                                                                                     “    S2 is a new breed of radio
                                                                                                     broadcast mixer. Using the latest
                                                                                                     technology components, S2 offers
                                                                                                                                                                             Selecting the PGM button also routes the
                                                                                                                                                                             channel to one of the two true cleanfeed
                                                                                                                                                                             busses (jumper selectable). When selecting
                                                                                                     digital audio quality with analogue                                     only the AUD button, for example to record
                                                                                                                                                                             off-line telephone conversations, a
                                                                                                     reliability in a modular format. S2
                                                                                                                                                                             cleanfeed is generated via the channel mix-
                                                                                                     has both digital and analogue input                                     minus system. When both PGM and AUD
                                                                                                     channels, together with                                                 are selected the channel operates in the
                                                                                                     simultaneous analogue and                                               true cleanfeed mode, sending the PGM
                                                                                                     digital outputs.
                                                                                                                          ”                                                  signal to the cleanfeed bus.

                                                                                                                                                                             Equalisation is fitted as standard and is
                                                                                                                                                                             enabled by the EQ button, providing 10dB
                                                                                                                                                                             cut and boost at HF (6.5kHz) and LF (100Hz).
                                                                                                       S2-CT Telco Channel                                                   The EQ button places the equalisation in
                                                                                                                                                                             and out of the signal path and is
                                                                                                                                                                             illuminated yellow when the EQ is active.
                                                                                                     The telco input channel controls the
                                                                                                     connection to a telephone balance unit


                                                                                                                                                                             “
                                                                                                     (or hybrid). It has one balanced line level
                                                                                                                                                                                 The telco input channel controls
                                                                                                     mono input on Neutrik XLR, and one
                                                                                                     balanced line level cleanfeed output to
                                                                                                                                                                             the connection to a telephone
                                                                                                     return to the hybrid.

                                                                                                     Selecting the CUE/PFL & T/B button routes
                                                                                                     the pre-fader input signal to the monitoring
                                                                                                                                                                             balance unit (or hybrid).
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       ”
                                                                                                     system where the signal can be heard via                                    S2-CB Blank Channel
                                                                                                     headphones and/or loudspeakers. In
                                                                                                     addition, talkback is automatically routed                              This blank channel is used to fill in areas of
                                                                                                     back to the caller via the cleanfeed system.                            the mixer where you don’t require an input
                                                                                                     This enables the presenter, or technical                                or output channel.



                                                                                                                                                                                                      PGM AUD PFL C/FEED T/B
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Mutes




                                                                                                                                                                                            Routing   L R L R L R 1 2 1 2              PFLTo
                                                                                                                                                                Trim                 VCA                                               Meter Select
                                                                                                                                Input
                                                                                                                                Trim               HF/LF   EQ
                                                                                                           Input                                                         PAN                 PFL                                       To Talkback
                                                                                                                                                    EQ
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Output
                                                                                                           C/Feed                                                                    VCA
                                                                                                           Output                                                              Fade R
                                                                                                           Hybrid Latch
                                                                                                                                                   CPU
                                                                                                                                                                                     Null
                                                                                                                                                                        Cleanfeed
                                                                                                                                                                        Selection                                                      L From AUD
                                                                                                                          PGM     Aud   EQ   Cue
                                                                                                                                             T/B   ON
                                                                                                                                                                       And routing
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       R Output
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Mix Bus


                                                         S2-CT Telco Input Channel     S2-CB Blank
                                                         and Rear.                     Channel.      S2-CT Telco Input Channel.



50                                                                                   Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


S2 - Output Channels
There are six different output                                                 A four way electronically interlocking switch            headphones (PHONES) on a 6.35mm stereo
                                                                               bank selects the source routed to the                    jack socket.
channels available, for                                                        speakers and headphones from either of
controlling monitoring in both a                                               two external inputs (EXT 1, EXT 2), the PGM,
                                                                                                                                        A front panel control is used to vary the
                                                                                                                                        monitor level. The studio monitor loud-
Control Room and separate                                                      or AUD output. The buttons illuminate to
                                                                                                                                        speaker level can be variable between 0 (cut
Studio, with the two main                                                      show the selected source, PGM and AUD in
                                                                                                                                        off ) and 10 (max). The output will need to
                                                                               green, EXT 1 and EXT 2 in red. The external
output channels also having a                                                  inputs can be used for monitoring an off air
                                                                                                                                        be fed to a suitable power amplifier to drive

master fader option.                                                           signal or another studio output.
                                                                                                                                        the loudspeakers. Headphones with

The master output channels provide                                             An illuminated Mute LED shows when a live
balanced analogue audio outputs as well as                                     microphone channel in the control room has
simultaneous AES/EBU or S/PDIF digital                                         muted the speakers, to prevent feedback.
audio outputs for both PRG and AUD                                             Mute outputs on the remote connector of
busses. The analogue mono output can be                                        the PGM output channel can be used to




                                                                                                                                                                                            M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - O U T P U T C H A N N E L S
selected from PRG or AUD and meter                                             remotely illuminate "Mic Live" lights.
selection is available to show either the PRG
                                                                               AUTO CUE/PFL buttons adjacent to each
bus, AUD bus, or to follow the Control Room
                                                                               level control allow the monitoring of PFL
Monitor selection.
                                                                               when an input channel has been selected
Both Control Room and Studio Monitor                                           to CUE/PFL. In addition, SPLIT CUE/PFL can
channels are available for controlling what’s                                  be selected to the headphones, which will
routed to the presenter’s and guest’s head-                                    place the selected source in mono in one
phones and monitor speakers. 2 external                                        ear and PFL in mono in the other.
inputs can also be monitored.
                                                                               This channel controls the signal
A minimum of 3 channels need to be fitted                                      conditioning for the talkback input and
into a mixer : channels S2-OMC, S2-ODP (or                                     output and routes these signals to and from
S2-ODPF) and S2-ODA (or S2-ODAF) must                                          the talkback bus. Internal jumpers can be
be fitted and S2-OMS is optional.                                              configured to allow talkback to replace or
                                                                               dim the selected source, dimming
                                                                               independently on monitor speakers or
 S2-OMC Control Room                                                           headphones.
 Monitor Channel                                                               A Global Talkback system can be configured
                                                                               to allow every contribution point in the
The control room monitor channel is
                                                                               control room and studio to communicate
common to every mixer and is used for the
                                                                               with each other via their microphone and
monitoring of various sources on the
                                                                               headphones.
control room loudspeakers (MONITOR) on a
6.35mm stereo jack socket and presenter’s
headphones (PHONES) on 6.35mm stereo
jack sockets. Front panel control knobs are                                        S2-OMS Studio Monitor
used to vary the monitor and headphone                                             Channel
levels and headphones can be plugged in
on the front or the rear of this channel. The                                  The studio monitor channel is optional and
control room monitor loudspeaker and                                           is used for the monitoring of various sources
headphone levels are variable between 0                                        on the studio loudspeakers (MONITOR) on a
(cut off ) and 10 (max).                                                       6.35mm stereo jack socket and studio


                             PGM Aud             PFL T/B
                                       Rev T/B




                             O/P O/P             O/P O/P             PGM
                    Timers




                             L R L R             L R 1 2
                                                                     Aud                                                  External
                                                                                                                          Inputs
                                                                     EXT 1
                                                                                                                          C/room/
       To S2-CT                                                                                                           Studio
                                                                     EXT 2
       Telco                                                                                                              Monitors
       Cleanfeed                                                     Auto    CPU                            Level
       Selection                                                     Cue
                                                                                                                          Pres/Studio
       L&R                                                           Auto                                                 Headphones
                                                                     Cue
                                                                                                            Level
                                                            Studio   Split            Cue/PFL Mute/
                                                             T/B     Cue              Dim Talkback                        Rev T/B
       From Mutes                                          Studio C/Room              Global T/B
       Bus                                                                                                                Talkback
                                                                                                                          Output
                                                                                                      To Monitor Meters
                                                                                                                                        S2-OMC Control Room         S2-OMS Studio Monitor
S2-OMS Studio Monitor Channel and S2-OMC Control Room Monitor Channel.                                                                  Monitor Channel and Rear.   Channel and Rear.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                                  51
                                                                                                                                                                                                           M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                                                           S2 - Output Channels
                                                           impedances of 35 ohms and above can be         red. External inputs can be used for                                                 The main power input from the S2-PSU is on
                                                           driven directly from the channel               monitoring an off air signal or another                                              this channel.
                                                           headphone connector on the rear panel.         studio output.
                                                                                                                                                                                               Button switches at the top of the channel
                                                           A four way electronically interlocking         An illuminated Mute LED shows when a live                                            select the mono output source from either
                                                           switch bank selects the source routed to       microphone channel in the studio has                                                 PGM or AUD. The Mono compatible output
                                                           the speakers and headphones from either        muted the speakers. Mute outputs on the                                              could be used to feed a mono transmitter or
                                                           of two external inputs (EXT 1, EXT 2), the     remote connector of the AUD output                                                   any station output monitoring system that
                                                           PGM, or AUD output. The buttons                channel can be used to remotely illuminate                                           requires a mono signal, such as a
                                                           illuminate to show the selected source,        "Mic Live" lights.                                                                   background music system.
                                                           PGM and AUD in green, EXT 1 and EXT 2 in
                                                                                                          Green illuminated AUTO CUE/PFL buttons                                               The digital output status bits (consumer or
                                                                                                          adjacent to each level control allow the                                             professional), output sample size (16, 20 or
                                                                                                          monitoring of PFL when an input channel                                              24 bits) and sample rate (automatically or
                                                                                                          has been selected to CUE/PFL, either to the                                          by internal jumpers from 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
                                                                                                          monitors or headphones.                                                              can be set. The digital output can be
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - O U T P U T C H A N N E L S




                                                                                                                                                                                               synchronised from an external input, or
                                                                                                          A separate Studio T/B button is provided to
                                                                                                                                                                                               from an on-board master clock. There are 4
                                                                                                          allow the presenter/engineer to talk to the
                                                                                                                                                                                               different sync modes : Master, Auto, Auto
                                                                                                          studio monitors and/or headphones and
                                                                                                                                                                                               Lock and Slave.
                                                                                                          internal jumpers allow this talkback to
                                                                                                          replace or dim the selected source.                                                  The illuminated LOCK LED shows that the
                                                                                                                                                                                               digital output is locked to the onboard
                                                                                                          A Global Talkback system can be configured
                                                                                                                                                                                               master clock, incoming word clock or
                                                                                                          to allow every contribution point in the
                                                                                                                                                                                               AES/EBU or S/PDIF sync signal. The channel
                                                                                                          control room and studio to communicate
                                                                                                                                                                                               automatically locks to a valid sync clock,
                                                                                                          with each other via their microphone
                                                                                                                                                                                               flashing if sync is lost. Synchronisation can
                                                                                                          and headphones.
                                                                                                                                                                                               be jumper disabled.


                                                                                                            S2-ODP Digital PGM Output
                                                                                                            Channel
                                                                                                                                                                                               “  There are 4 different sync
                                                                                                                                                                                               modes : Master, Auto, Auto Lock
                                                                                                          This channel is common to every mixer and
                                                                                                          provides a digital and analogue output from
                                                                                                          the PGM mix bus. The digital output is
                                                                                                          available as a balanced AES/EBU signal via a
                                                                                                                                                                                               and Slave.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   ”
                                                                                                          standard XLR or as S/PDIF on phono                                                    S2-ODPF Digital PGM Output
                                                                                                          sockets. The balanced analogue PGM                                                    Channel with Master Fader
                                                                                                          output and mono output is on a 15 way
                                                                                                          D-type connector. This also carries the two                                          The S2-ODPF channel also has a 100mm
                                                                                                          sets of latching relay contacts for the control                                      VCA output fader for production use which
                                                                                                          room mutes.                                                                          provides unity gain when fully open.



                                                                                                                                     PGM Aud              PFL T/B
                                                                                                                                                REV T/B




                                                                                                                                      O/P O/P             O/P O/P
                                                                                                                            Timers




                                                                                                                                     L R L R              L R 1 2     Fader Option
                                                                                                               From Left                                                                                                                        Analogue PGM
                                                                                                               PGM Bus                                                                                                                          (AUD) Output Left

                                                                                                               From Right                                                                                                                       Analogue PGM
                                                                                                               PGM Bus                                                                                                                          (AUD) Output Right

                                                                                                                                                                                       A/D                       Output                         Analogue Mono
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Select                         Output
                                                                                                                                                                              PGM
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Digital   AES/SPDIF           AES/EBU PGM
                                                                                                               From CPU                                                               CPU                         Audio
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2




                                                                                                                                                                               Aud                                                              (Aud) Output
                                                                                                                                                                                                                Interface
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3




                                                                                                                                                                                 CR
                                                                                                                                                                    S2-ODP Only MON                                                     1   A   SPDIF PGM
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                (Aud) Output
                                                                                                               From                                                                   Meter                                             2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            B
                                                                                                                                                                                      Select      Meterbridge                                   SPDIF Sync
                                                                                                               Mutes Bus
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                AES/EBU Sync
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2




                                                                                                               From L&R                                                                                                     AES/SPDIF
                                                                                                               PFL Bus
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Word Clock
                                                                                                               From
                                                                                                               Talkback
                                                                                                               Bus


                                                               S2-ODP Digital PGM Output Channel and
                                                               S2-ODPF Digital PGM Output Channel with    S2-ODP Digital PGM Output Channel (S2-ODPF with Master Fader) and S2-ODA Digital AUD Output Channel
                                                               Master Fader and Rear.                     (S2-ODAF with Master Fader).



52                                                                                        Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


S2 - Output Channels
                                                S2-ODA Digital AUD Output
                                                Channel

                                              This channel is also common to every mixer
                                              and provides a digital and analogue output
                                              from the AUD mix bus. The digital output is
                                              available as a balanced AES/EBU signal via a
                                              standard XLR or as S/PDIF on phono
                                              sockets. The balanced analogue AUD
                                              outputs are available on a 15 way D-type
                                              connector which also carries the two sets of
                                              latching relay contacts for the studio mutes.

                                              Button switches at the top of the channel


“
                                              select the monitoring source to the




                                                                                                                                        M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - O U T P U T C H A N N E L S
      Following on from the Sovereign
                                              meterbridge. Meters in the meterbridge
range of audio mixers, S2 combines
                                              which are connected to the "Monitor Meter"
all the features needed of a radio            position will display the selected signal from
broadcast mixer in a stylish, flush-          the electronically interlocking PGM, AUD, or
mounting chassis : a wide range of            CR MON buttons. The CR MON signal source
input and output channels, PFL/cue,           is whatever is being monitored on the
                                              presenter's headphone on the control room
fader-start operation of equipment,
                                              monitor channel, pre talkback and level
automatic monitor muting on mic-              control. This signal could be PGM, AUD,
live, light controlling remote outputs,       EXT 1, EXT 2, or PFL, as selected by
optional EQ on input modules, gram            the presenter.
amp input options and 2 main audio            The digital output status bits (consumer or
buses, allowing you to broadcast on           professional), output sample size (16, 20 or
the PRG bus while recording on the            24 bits) and sample rate (automatically or by
AUD bus, with bus output selection            internal jumpers from 32 kHz to 96 kHz)


                   ”
                                              can be set. The digital output can be
on each module.
                                              synchronised from an external input, or
                                              from an on-board master clock. There are
                                              4 different sync modes : Master, Auto, Auto
                                              Lock and Slave.

                                              The illuminated LOCK LED shows that the
                                              digital output is locked to the onboard
                                              master clock, incoming word clock or
                                              AES/EBU or S/PDIF compatible sync signal.
                                              The channel automatically searches for a
                                              sync signal on the Word Clock, or the
                                              selected digital input, and automatically
                                              locks to a valid sync clock. If sync is lost then
                                              the indicator will flash. Synchronisation can
                                              be jumper disabled.


                                                S2-ODAF Digital AUD Output
                                                Channel with Master Fader

                                              The S2-ODAF channel also has a 100mm
                                              VCA output fader for production use which
                                              provides unity gain when fully open.




                                                                                                  S2-ODA Digital AUD Output Channel
                                                                                                  and S2-ODAF Digital AUD Output
                                                                                                  Channel with Master Fader and Rear.


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                              53
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                                                                   S2 - Meterbridge Modules
                                                                   In the meterbridge area you                     S2-MPPM Meterbridge PPM                                                                           S2-ML53 Meterbridge LED
                                                                   can choose from four styles of                  Meter Panel                                                                                       Meter Panel
                                                                                                                   S2-MPPT Meterbridge True
                                                                   metering, a phase meter, a                      PPM Meter Panel                                                                           The LED meter consists of 53 LEDs showing
                                                                   dual timer, a PFL/Talkback loud-                                                                                                          both VU and peak representation. Both PPM
                                                                   speaker, 2 talkback modules, a                The S2-MPPM panel has two fast-reading                                                      and VU scales are shown, one on each side
                                                                   switch panel and a range of                   moving-coil meters with PPM-style scale.                                                    of the LED bar-graph.

                                                                   blanking plates. S2's                         The S2-MPPT panel has two moving-coil
                                                                   meterbridge modules are freely                PPM movements, conforming to true PPM
                                                                                                                 ballistics.
                                                                   assignable so that you can
                                                                   position them exactly where                   The PPMs have a 1-7 scale and are
                                                                                                                 configured such that a 1kHz signal, at 0dB
                                                                   you want them.                                at the PGM output, will indicate a meter
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - M E T E R B R I D G E M O D U L E S




                                                                   The dual meter panels are used for            reading of 4. Each mark on the PPM scale
                                                                   monitoring console signal levels. Up to       indicates a 4dB change in signal level.
                                                                   three different meter panels can be housed
                                                                   in the meterbridge. The meters can be
                                                                   configured internally to be fed from one of
                                                                   three signal sources, the selected source
                                                                   indicated by a LED :

                                                                   Select    The output of the meter switch                                                                                                          S2-MB1-5 Meterbridge
                                                                             on the AUD output module which                                                                                                          Blanking Plates 1 - 5
                                                                             can show PGM, AUD, or CR MON,
                                                                             which is the selected monitor                                                                                                    Meterbridge blanking plates are available in
                                                                             source on the control room                                                                                                       channel widths from 1 to 5 inclusive and are
                                                                                                                   S2-MVU Meterbridge VU
                                                                             monitor module, (EXT 1, EXT 2,                                                                                                   used to fill areas in the meterbridge not
                                                                                                                   Meter Panel
                                                                             PGM, or AUD) interrupted by PFL.                                                                                                 occupied by active modules.

                                                                   Program PGM output which can optionally       The S2-MVU two moving coil VU meters are
                                                                           be interrupted by PFL.                configured such that a 1kHz signal, at
                                                                                                                 +4dBu at the PGM output, will indicate a
                                                                   PFL       The output of the PFL bus.
                                                                                                                 meter reading of 0VU.




                                                                   “    The dual meter panels are
                                                                   used for monitoring console signal
                                                                   levels. Up to three different meter
                                                                   panels can be housed in the
                                                                   meterbridge.
                                                                                  ”                                                              PGM Aud              PFL T/B
                                                                                                                                                            Rev T/B




                                                                                                                                                  O/P O/P             O/P O/P
                                                                                                                                        Timers




                                                                                                                                                 L R L R              L R 1 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            From Monitor Output
                                                                    S2-MPH Meterbridge Phase                                                                                                                                                       S2-ML
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     CUE/PFL
                                                                    Meter Panel                                                                                                                                                 REV T/B
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Talkback
                                                                                                                                                                                              S2-MT                                                                  Loudspeaker
                                                                                                                                                                                Dual Timer, Clock And Date Display
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        CUE/PFL REV T/B
                                                                   The S2-MPH is a phase                                                                                           St ar t
                                                                                                                                                                                   St op     Reset    Mode

                                                                   meter which operates on
                                                                                                                                                                                   St ar t   Reset    Mode
                                                                   the selected source to the                                                                                      S t op


                                                                   meters. 5 LED indicators                           To cleanfeed
                                                                   show the phase angle in                            Left (S2-CSMM)
                                                                                                                                                                                       PGM Meters                         Monitor Meters
                                                                   45 degree steps from 0                             To Cleanfeed                                                                                                          S2-MPPM Dual PPM Meter Panel
                                                                                                                      Right (S2-CSMM)                                                                                                       S2-MPPT True Dual PPM Meter Panel
                                                                   (in-phase) to 180 (out                                                                                                                                                   S2-MVU Dual VU Meter Panel
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            S2-ML53 Dual LED Bar Graph Meter
                                                                   of phase).                                                                                                           PFL Meters                       Phase Meters       S2-MPH PHase Meter Panel



                                                                   A separate phase meter
                                                                                                                 S2-MPPM/T Meterbridge PPM Panel, S2-MVU Meterbridge VU Meter Panel, S2-ML53 Meterbridge LED Meter
                                                                   can be linked to each                         Panel, S2-MPH Meterbridge Phase Meter Panel, S2-MTBS Station Master and S2-MTB6 6 Way Talkback Panels,
                                                                   meter in the meterbridge.                     S2-MT Meterbridge Dual Timer Panel and S2-ML Meterbridge Loudspeaker Monitor and Talkback Panel.



54                                                                                               Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


S2 - Meterbridge Modules

 S2 Without Meterbridge                        S2-MTBS Meterbridge Station                     S2-MTB6 Meterbridge 6 Way
                                               Master Talkback Panel                           Talkback Panel
The S2 is available without a meterbridge.
This does affect some of the features
available on the mixer. Contact
sales@sonifex.co.uk for further information
and pricing.




                                                                                                                                             M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - M E T E R B R I D G E M O D U L E S
                                              This is used for interfacing with a Sonifex     This is used for communicating with up to
                                              Station Master studio switcher and talkback     6 other locations, studios or mixers, and
                                              router and has buttons for talkback, Offer      with the Sonifex TB-6D and TB-6R talkback
                                              and Accept switching and profanity delay        intercoms. While a button is pressed, the
                                              control.                                        switch is illuminated and the talkback is


“    In the meterbridge area you
can choose from four styles of
metering, a phase meter, a dual
                                                S2-MT Meterbridge Dual
                                                Timer Panel
                                                                                              active. The buttons work with both a
                                                                                              momentary and latched operation - if held
                                                                                              down, the selection is cancelled on release.
                                                                                              Otherwise the button is alternate action.
timer, a PFL/Talkback loudspeaker,
2 talkback modules and a range of                                                              S2-ML Meterbridge
blanking plates. S2's meterbridge                                                              Loudspeaker Monitor Panel
modules are freely assignable so that
you can position them exactly where
you want them.
                   ”
 S2-MSB3 S2 Meterbridge
 Switch Panel With 3 Buttons

                                              Each of the dual timers can be used for
This is a meterbridge                         timing events triggered by Timer 1, Timer 2,
panel, 1 channel wide,                        or the Mic fader open signal. In addition the
with 3 buttons which can                      upper timer is used for displaying the time
                                                                                              The S2-ML speaker is used for monitoring
be used for bespoke                           of day and the lower timer for displaying
                                                                                              PFL and reverse talkback in the control
control of the S2, or for                     the date. The illumination pattern of the red
                                                                                              room directly from the mixer. Two control
your own purposes, e.g.                       LEDs indicates the timer display mode.
                                                                                              knobs are provided for adjusting the levels
equipment control.
                                              The date and time can be synchronised to a      of the PFL and Talkback signals from cut-off
Contact Sonifex with your                     very accurate internal clock or optionally      at 0 to unity gain at 10. The speaker is
particular mixer control                      from an external source, MSF, DCF, SMPTE,       muted automatically when the control
requirements.                                 or RS232 time code string.                      room mute is active, to prevent feedback.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                   55
                                                                                                                                                              M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                                                       S2 - Chassis Sizes
                                                                                                                                                      S2-05 Chassis
                                                        S2-7SS Script Space                            Chassis Design
                                                                                                                                                      Chassis with 5 channel width sections.

                                                                                                     The S2 chassis is available in 5 channel
                                                                                                     width sections, allowing 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and
                                                                                                     30 channel width mixers. This means S2 can
                                                                                                     be used for small newsrooms or large
                                                                                                     on-air situations.


                                                                                                     S2-10 Chassis
                                                                                                     Chassis with 10 channel width sections.



                                                                                                                                                      S2-15 Chassis
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - C H A S S I S S I Z E S




                                                                                                                                                      Chassis with 15 channel width sections.
                                                       The script space occupies an area of 7
                                                       channel widths, and is designed to hold
                                                       documents or scripts for the mixer operator
                                                       when desk space is at a premium.
                                                       The S2-7SS Script Space is 266mm wide x
                                                       390mm deep.
                                                                                                     S2-20 Chassis
                                                                                                     Chassis with 20 channel width sections.
                                                        S2-10SS Script Space




                                                       This script space is 10 channels wide and                                                       Chassis Sizes
                                                       is large enough for a small keyboard.
                                                       The S2-10SS Script Space is 380mm wide x                                                       Model No.           Number of Channels
                                                       390mm deep.                                                                                    S-05                        5
                                                                                                     S2-25 Chassis                                    S-10                       10
                                                                                                     Chassis with 25 channel width sections.          S-15                       15
                                                                                                                                                      S-20                       20
                                                                                                                                                      S-25                       25
                                                                                                                                                      S-30                       30




                                                                                                                                                      S2-30 Chassis
                                                                                                                                                      Chassis with 30 channel width sections.




                                                       “   The S2 combines all the features
                                                       needed in a radio broadcast mixer
                                                       with a stylish, flush-mounting -
                                                       chassis. A choice of chassis size is
                                                       available to meet your personal
                                                       needs and preferences.
                                                                                 ”
56                                                                                  Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


S 2 - M i xe r P l a ce m e n t i n Fu r n i t u r e
 S2 Mixer Weights and Boxed Dimensions

Mixer Type    Width (cm)        Depth (cm)           Height (cm)      Gross Weight (kg)     Nett Weight (kg)
S2-30           137                  70                  45                     36                  34
S2-25           100                  70                  45                     33                  31
S2-20           100                  70                  45                     30                  28
S2-15           100                  70                  45                     27                25.5
S2-10            60                  70                  45                     24                22.5
S2-05            60                  70                  45                     21                19.5

Notes: Weights are approximate and based on a mixer chassis loaded with channels.




                                                                                                                                                                   M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - S 2 M I X E R P L AC E M E N T I N F U R N I T U R E
S2 Placement in Cut-Out
Viewed from Above
                                                                                                               Solutions Single Mixer Furniture Package.
                276mm                                              Woodwork
    40mm                                                           Rear Edge




                                                                            506mm


                                                                                                                               S2 Mixer
                                                                                                                               Viewed from Side Profile

196mm S2-5
387mm S2-10                                                        Woodwork
                       577mm S2-15
                       768mm S2-20                                 Front Edge
                       958mm S2-25                                                                                                                         180mm
                      1149mm S2-30
                                                                       7°                                                                           10mm


                                                                                                                                                   117mm
                                                                     23mm
                                                                                 Mounting Holes 5mm Diameter
                                                                                                                     505mm
                                                                                                                              521mm 565mm


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                         57
                                                                                                                                                                M I X I N G CO N S O L E S


                                                    S 2 - Po we r S u p p l y
                                                     S2-PSU Power Supply                                                                              Technical Specification

                                                                                                                                                     Input/Output Impedances
                                                                                                                                                     Mic Input:           > 1k5       electronically balanced
                                                                                                         S2-ODP PGM output channel on                Mono Line Input:     > 20k       electronically balanced
                                                                                                         the mixer.                                  Stereo Line Input:   > 20k       electronically balanced
                                                                                                                                                     PGM & AUD Output:    < 75       electronically balanced
                                                                                                        Four LED's on the front of the unit          Mono Output:         < 75       electronically balanced
                                                                                                                                                     Monitor Outputs:     < 75       unbalanced
                                                                                                        indicate whether the power to the four
                                                                                                                                                     AES Input/Output:    110
                                                                                                        voltage rails is being supplied correctly.   S/PDIF Input/Output: 75
                                                    S2-PSU Front Panel.                                                                              BNC Wordclock input: 50
                                                                                                                                                     Input/Output Gain Range
                                                    The S2-PSU is a 2U high rack-mount                                                               Mic Input:            Preset pot +13dB to +66dB ref
                                                                                                                                                                           -50dBu, TRIM pot ±12dB
                                                    unit, which supplies power to the                                                                Mono Line Input:      Preset pot -6dB to +10dB ref
                                                    entire range of S2 mixers. A lead with a                                                                               0dBu, TRIM pot ±12dB
                                                                                                                                                     Stereo Line Input:    Preset pot -6dB to +10dB ref
                                                    special 9 pin D-Type socket on each end is                                                                             0dBu, TRIM pot ±12dB
M I X I N G CO N S O L E S - P O W E R S U P P LY




                                                    used to connect the power supply to the         S2-PSU Back Panel.                               Telco Input:          Preset pot -6dB to +10dB ref
                                                                                                                                                                           0dBu, TRIM pot ±12dB
                                                                                                                                                     Telco Output:         Preset pot -6dB to +4dB ref
                                                                                                                                                                           0dBu
                                                                                                                                                     Mix Minus Input:      Preset pot -6dB to +10dB ref
                                                     S2-PSUS Dual Power Supply Switcher                                                                                    0dBu, TRIM pot ±12dB
                                                                                                                                                     Mix Minus Output:     Preset pot -3dB to +3dB ref
                                                                                                                                                                           0dBu
                                                                                                                                                     Digital Input:        0dBFS = +12dBu on input;
                                                                                                                                                                           TRIM pot ±12dB allowing 0dBu
                                                                                                                                                                           to +24dBu
                                                                                                                                                     Digital Output:       0dBFS = +18dBu
                                                                                                                                                     Frequency Response
                                                                                                                                                     Mic Input:               40Hz to 20kHz, -1dB,+0dB (-3dB
                                                                                                                                                                              at 130Hz with HPF in)
                                                                                                                                                     Line Inputs:             20Hz to 20kHz, - 0.5dB,+0dB
                                                                                                                                                     RIAA Input:              30Hz to 16kHz ±1.5dB RIAA
                                                                                                                                                                              equalised
                                                                                                                                                     Noise (20Hz to 20kHz)
                                                    S2-PSUS Front Panel.                                                                             Mic Input E.I.N.:          -129dB with 150   source
                                                                                                                                                     Stereo Inputs
                                                                                                                                                     (fader down, no routing): -89dB ref 0dB
                                                    The S2-PSUS is a passive power switcher         in length connect to 2 x S2-PSU units. With      Stereo Inputs (fader down,
                                                    which takes the power feeds from 2 x S2-        LED failure indicators and GPI alarms, the       one channel routed):       -89dB
                                                                                                                                                     Stereo Inputs (unity gain,
                                                    PSU units and switches between them in          S2-PSUS is the perfect dual redundant            no routing):               -89dB
                                                    the event of failure. Two trailing leads 0.5m   power supply module.                             Stereo Inputs (unity gain,
                                                                                                                                                     one channel routed):       -86dB
                                                                                                                                                     Stereo Inputs (unity gain,
                                                                                                                                                     two channels routed):      -83dB
                                                                                                                                                     Distortion
                                                                                                                                                     Total Harmonic
                                                                                                                                                     Distortion:              0.015% at 1kHz, 0dB
                                                                                                                                                                              0.025% at 10kHz, 0dB
                                                                                                                                                     Crosstalk
                                                                                                                                                     Inter-channel:           < -90dBu
                                                                                                                                                     Stereo:                  -90dBu at 1kHz
                                                                                                                                                     Equalisation
                                                                                                    S2-PSUS Back Panel.                              LF Shelving at 100Hz:    ±7dB
                                                                                                                                                     HF Shelving at 6.5kHz:   ±7dB
                                                                                                                                                     Range
                                                                                                                                                     Pan Range:               Pot position: Fully clockwise,
                                                                                                     S2-BI Bus Interlink Cable                                                centre, fully anti-clockwise;


                                                    “    S2 is a new breed of radio
                                                    broadcast mixer. Using the latest
                                                    technology components, S2 offers
                                                                                                                                                     Balance Range:
                                                                                                                                                                              Left: Off, 0dB, +3dB;
                                                                                                                                                                              Right: +3dB, 0dB, Off
                                                                                                                                                                              respectively.
                                                                                                                                                                              ±6dB
                                                                                                                                                     Common Mode Rejection Ratio
                                                    digital audio quality with analogue                                                              Mic Input:          > 100dB at 70dB gain

                                                    reliability in a modular format. S2                                                              Digital I/O
                                                                                                                                                     Sync Input Sample Rate: 30kHz - 100kHz
                                                    has both digital and analogue input                                                              Output Sample Rates
                                                                                                                                                     (Using Onboard Clock): 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, & 96kHz
                                                    channels, together with                                                                          Output Sample Width: 16, 20, 24 bit
                                                    simultaneous analogue                                                                            Output



                                                                            ”
                                                                                                                                                     Headphone                >45 , 400
                                                    and digital outputs.                                                                             Output Load:             recommended
                                                                                                    This is used to connect two S2 chassis so        Maximum Output           +26dBu balanced
                                                                                                                                                     (Analogue):              into 2k or greater
                                                                                                    that they can function as one mixer.
                                                                                                                                                     Power
                                                                                                    Note that a maximum total of 30 channels is
                                                                                                                                                     Power (S2-PSU):          Filtered IEC, switchable 115V,
                                                                                                    allowed in a split mixer configuration.                                   230V, fused, 210W max.




58                                                                                 Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S


S 2 - S o l u t i o n s Fu r n i t u r e & Co m p l e t e S t u d i o Pa c k a g e s
                                              Sonifex has been manufacturing and distributing complete
                                              studio packages for over 8 years and they've been a remarkable
                                              success with installations in more than 60 studios since initiation.
                                              The S2 Solutions studio package consists of the S2 digital I/O
                                              analogue mixer mounted in modular ash technical furniture and
                                              surrounded by leading brands of high quality broadcasting
                                              equipment carefully integrated to provide an easy to operate
                                              professional studio.

                                              With years of experience of manufacturing
                                              and distributing radio studio equipment,
                                              Sonifex is perfectly positioned to advise on   “   Appearances are important,
                                                                                             even on radio !
                                                                                                                  ”




                                                                                                                                              R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S
                                              the proper equipment required to get your
                                              radio station up and running, on time and
                                                                                             The furniture is modular, so it can be used
                                              to budget.
                                                                                             for a small L-shaped production or talks
                                              Good-looking Furniture                         studio, through to a larger U-shaped on-air
                                              Oozing Professionalism                         studio. It's easy to fit together with large
                                              One of the main reasons why people keep        internal spaces for cable routing, so from
                                              coming back to use our S2 Solutions            every angle, the furniture looks neat, orderly
                                              packages is because of the high quality of     and professional. If you need additions to
                                              the technical furniture, in deep solid ash     the woodwork, or modifications, we can
                                              with high quality, hard wearing blue/grey      produce woodwork to your design which
                                              linoleum surfaces. The surfaces are not only   can integrate with our standard furniture to
                                              robust but also have good acoustic qualities   save costs.
                                              - items dropped on the surface produce a
                                                                                             Ease of Assembly & Ease of Use
                                              dull thud to which the microphone is
                                                                                             The furniture has been designed to be
                                              not sensitive.
                                                                                             easily shipped and then quickly assembled
                                              Appearances are important, even on radio !     by you on-site. The woodwork is packaged
                                              As your customers and visitors walk into       in protective cartons and simple
                                              your studios, they are going to feel that      instructions allow you to assemble the
                                              they've walked into a professional, smooth-    furniture rapidly and with a minimum
                                              running, radio station.                        of tools.




                                                                                             “   Your Solutions studio is a delight.
                                                                                             It was assembled ready for operation
                                                                                             within half a day. No problems,
                                                                                             no hitches.
                                                                                                           ”
                                                                                             Rodney Wheelan,
                                                                                             Broadcast Services




Solutions Single Mixer Furniture Package.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                    59
                                                                                                                                                      R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S


                                     S 2 - S o l u t i o n s Fu r n i t u r e & Co m p l e t e S t u d i o Pa c k a g e s
                                                                                                          SOL-T12 - This consists of 2 x 6U racks
                                                                                                          mounted on legs above the work-surface,
                                                                                                          so that you can use the space underneath
                                                                                                          for CD/minidisc storage or for paperwork.




                                     SOL-B12 12U Support Base Pod

                                     The SOL-B12 12U support base pod has
R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S




                                     adjustable feet and provides a solid platform                                                                           SOL-LGG80
                                     for the SOL-SB1000, or SOL-SB1600, side-                                                                                Grey Leg
                                     return. The side return can also be supported
                                     by SOL-LGG80 grey legs which have
                                                                                                          SOL-T12 Straight 2 x 6U Top Pod on Legs.
                                     adjustable feet ensuring that the work-tops
                                     are steady and level.

                                     The studio furniture is ergonomically
                                     designed to house all of the technical
                                     equipment and to place frequently used
                                     items within easy reach of the presenter.
                                     There is a choice of top-pods to house the
                                                                                                          “   Sonifex has been manufacturing
                                                                                                          and distributing complete studio
                                                                                                          packages for over 8 years and
                                     equipment -
                                                                                                          they've been a remarkable success
                                                                                                          with installations in more than

                                                                                                                                               ”
                                     SOL-D8 - This is an 8U high ash top-pod
                                                                                                          60 studios since initiation.
                                     which can be placed virtually anywhere (*)
                                     on the work-surface to suit the presenter.
                                     It usually contains 2 x CD players and 2 x
                                     minidisc recorder/players, but can house
                                     any equipment.
                                                                                                          Pre-Wired Cabling
                                                                                                          The packages come complete with
                                     SOL-D12 - This 12U high ash top-pod allows                           prewired cabling, each cable connecting
                                     more space for further equipment that                                directly from the equipment to the mixer,
                                     needs to be close to the presenter.                                  so that your studio can be up and running
                                                                                                          in only a few hours. Cabling includes the
                                                                                                          power distribution, remote control and
                                                                                                          audio connections to and from the mixer.
                                                                                                          All the cables can be hidden from view
                                                                                                          allowing a simple, tidy installation. SOL-
                                                                                                          CVRC cable covers can be fitted wherever
                                                                                                          you need cable access through the desktop
                                                                                                          surface, for example, for microphone leads,
                                                                                                                                                             SOL-CVRC
                                                                                                          or PC monitor cables. For more complex
                                                                                                                                                             Cable Cover
                                                                                                          installations, the cabling can be wired to
                                                                                                          Krone blocks for ease of future adjustment
                                     SOL-D12 12U Top Pod.
                                                                                                          and maintenance.




                                                                    SOL-D8 8U Top Pod.

                                     * Note that whilst the SOL-D8 and SOL-D12 are movable on
                                     the desk-top, their position needs to be relatively fixed in order
                                     to cover the cable hole underneath the units which routes
                                     cables from the top-pod to the mixer.




60                                                                                Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S


S 2 - S o l u t i o n s Fu r n i t u r e & Co m p l e t e S t u d i o Pa c k a g e s
There are two main types of layout depending on whether you
want a single large mixer, or a split console with 2 smaller mixers
connected together, but leaving a centre space for PC monitors.

  S2 Solutions Single
  Mixer Furniture

This furniture is for use if you want to use a
single mixer, i.e. not a split-frame. With both
guest and presenter positions, the package
is ideal for hospital radios, RSLs (restricted
service licences), sports grounds, colleges
and university media studies departments,




                                                                                                                                                       R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S
as well as community and commercial
                                                  Single Mixer Furniture, L-Shaped.
radio stations.

The S2 Solutions Single Mixer Package             The configuration of the S2 mixer depends on
features the Sonifex S2 broadcast console         the equipment that you need for your studio.
combined with quality broadcasting                See the S2 mixer brochure for more
equipment. The basic furniture is L-shaped        information on the input channels available.
and can be installed either left or right-        A simple on-air studio package can consist of
handed, with the SOL-CVR80 end panel              1 high quality presenter microphone on an
protecting the end which is on display. An        adjustable microphone arm, 1 guest
additional side return can be added to            microphone on a table stand, 2 pairs of
make it U-shaped, allowing more space for         headphones and a pair of small book-shelf
turntables, a PC, or a further guest position.    speakers mounted on desktop speaker stands,
                                                  such as the SOL-MS21 pair, behind the mixer.

                                                  There are various audio sources readily
                                                  available to the presenter to create
                                                  programme content. For the playback of
                                                  advertisements, jingles, sweepers, trails,
                                                  news items and music, 2 x broadcast
SOL-CVR80 End Panel.                              minidisc recorders can be provided. 2 x
                                                  broadcast CD players can play music and
The desktop into which the mixer rests can        either a cassette deck, or CD recorder are
                                                                                                  SOL-MS21 monitor speaker stands, 21cm high, black,
be either 1.3m (SOL-MB1300) or 1.5m (SOL-         ideal for giving guests copies of interviews,
                                                                                                  pair (as shown above). Also available as SOL-MS32
MB1500) in width, depending on the space          or for sending commercials to clients. For PC   monitor speaker stands, 32cm high, black, pair and
that you have available.                          playout automation systems, we can              SOL-MS40 monitor speaker stands, 40cm high.




                                                                                                  “     From opening the boxes to
                                                                                                  connecting the last lead took exactly
                                                                                                  65 minutes ! The best thing was that
                                                                                                  when I switched on the mains power
                                                                                                  to the system, it all worked
                                                                                                  first time.
                                                                                                              ”
                                                                                                  Tim Ashburner,
                                                                                                  World Radio Network




Solutions Single Mixer Furniture Package.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                             61
                                                                                                                                     R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S


                                     S 2 - S o l u t i o n s Fu r n i t u r e & Co m p l e t e S t u d i o Pa c k a g e s
                                     recommend manufacturers to contact and
                                                                                           S2 Solutions Split
                                     these can be integrated into the package
                                                                                           Mixer Furniture
                                     quite easily.

                                     The 12U support base pod contains all the           This furniture is for use with an S2 split
                                     remaining studio equipment. An approved             mixer (i.e. 10-15 channel frame on one side
                                     telephone hybrid, mixer power supply and            and 10-15 channel frame on the other). The
                                     power amplifier can be included. An opto-           S2 Solutions split mixer furniture comprises
                                     isolated, illuminated "mic live" sign can be        U-shaped woodwork which allows space for
                                     located outside the studio door and a               up to 3 TFT monitor screens in the centre of
                                     studio clock is also essential, although this       the presenter's vision for automated
                                                                                                                                          Split Mixer Furniture.
                                     can be built into the S2 mixer if required.         playout, or editing, systems.
                                     It's worth noting that the choice, variety and      This package has space for 2 guest seating
                                     quality of available equipment is large and         positions, behind the mixers, and is ideal for
                                     it changes frequently. So, we'll recommend          small scale radio, local radio or smaller
R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S




                                     the best equipment available at the time of         studios in larger stations.
                                     your enquiry.
                                                                                         The choice of equipment is similar to that of
                                                                                         the S2 Solutions single mixer furniture
                                                                                         except that with the larger space available,
                                                                                         you can expand the range and quality of
                                                                                         the other equipment chosen, e.g. you may
                                                                                         need an additional guest microphone and          Split Mixer Furniture with SOL-MBCT Talks Table
                                                                                         pair of headphones, a headphone                  Desk Top.
                                                                                         distribution amplifier, a turntable, an
                                                                                         additional telephone hybrid to have 2
                                                                                         callers on-air simultaneously or an audio
                                                                                         codec to conduct outside broadcasts.
                                     Single Mixer Furniture, U-Shaped.
                                                                                         Talkback panels can be added and, when
                                                                                         combined with the Sonifex Station Master
                                                                                         studio switcher and router, a number of

                                     “    The S2 Solutions split mixer
                                     furniture comprises U-shaped
                                     woodwork which allows space for
                                                                                         studios can be connected together to
                                                                                         control on-air switching.

                                                                                         We can offer you a complete installation
                                     up to 3 TFT monitor screens in the                  service quoting any equipment that you
                                     centre of the presenter's vision                    would like. We've installed central technical
                                     for automated playout, or                           areas as well as studios and fitted krone
                                     editing, systems.
                                                            ”                            cabling on some installations, providing a
                                                                                         turnkey solution for smaller radio stations.




                                                                                         Solutions Dual Mixer Furniture Package.



62                                                                       Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S


S 2 - S o l u t i o n s Fu r n i t u r e & Co m p l e t e S t u d i o Pa c k a g e s
                                                        Technical Specification

“   Sonifex has been manufacturing
and distributing complete
studio packages for over 8 years and
                                                       For a detailed quote on the S2 Solutions
                                                       furniture and radio studio packages,
                                                                                                                           and quantity of studios that you need, the
                                                                                                                           kind of equipment that you're looking for
they've been a remarkable success                      contact Sonifex outlining your                                      and your budget. We can then tailor a
with installations in more than 60                     requirements. It's useful to know the type                          solution to meet your needs.
studios since initiation.
                             ”                          Equipment Type
                                                        Description
                                                        SOL-D8
                                                        SOL-D12
                                                                          S2 Solutions 8U Desk Top 19” Rack
                                                                          S2 Solutions 12U Desk Top 19” Rack
                                                                                                                                  Standard Qty Single
                                                                                                                                    Mixer Furniture
                                                                                                                                          1
                                                                                                                                           0
                                                                                                                                                               Standard Qty Split
                                                                                                                                                                Mixer Furniture
                                                                                                                                                                       1
                                                                                                                                                                       0
                                                        SOL-T12           S2 Solutions 12U Top 19” Rack Straight Double On Legs            0                           0
                                                        SOL-B12           S2 Solutions 12U Support Base 19” Rack                           1                           1
                                                        SOL-SB1000        S2 Solutions 1000mm (w) x 600mm (d) Side Return Desk Top         0                           2
                                                        SOL-SB1600        S2 Solutions 1600mm (w) x 600mm (d) Side Return Desk Top         1                           0
                                                        SOL-MB1300        S2 Solutions 1300mm (w) x 900mm (d) Mixer Desk Top               0                           0




                                                                                                                                                                                          R A D I O S T U D I O PAC K AG E S
                                                        SOL-MB1500        S2 Solutions 1500mm (w) x 900mm (d) Mixer Desk Top               1                           0
                                                        SOL-MBC           S2 Solutions Split Desk Centre Mixer Desk Top                    0                           1
                                                        SOL-MBCT          S2 Solutions Split Desk Centre Talks Table Mixer Desk Top        0                           0
                                                        SOL-MBL           S2 Solutions Split Desk Mixer Left Hand Corner Desk Top          0                           1
                                                        SOL-MBR           S2 Solutions Split Desk Mixer Right Hand Corner Desk Top         0                           1
                                                        SOL-LGG80         S2 Solutions Table Legs (Pair) Grey 80mm Dia & Mnting Plate      2                           4
                                                        SOL-CVR60         S2 Solutions 600mm Desk End Cover Panel                          0                           0
                                                        SOL-CVR80         S2 Solutions 810mm Desk End Cover Panel                          2                           0
                                                        SOL-CVRC          S2 Solutions Cable Hole Covers 80mm Inc Fitting                  2                           3
                                                        SOL-MS21          S2 Solutions Monitor Speaker Stands, 21cm High, Black, Pair      0                           0
                                                        SOL-MS32          S2 Solutions Monitor Speaker Stands, 32cm High, Black, Pair      0                           0
                                                        SOL-MS40          S2 Solutions Monitor Speaker Stands, 40cm High, Black, Pair      0                           0
                                                        SOL-FR            S2 Solutions Cage Nut And Screw Kit For 10 Panels (40 Sets)      1                           2


                            S2 Solutions Single Mixer Furniture                                   S2 Solutions Split Mixer Furniture
                            Aerial View                                                           Aerial View


                                                                                                                              SOL-MBCT
                                                1600



                      600      SOL-D8              SOL-SB1600                              1600      SOL-MBL                   SOL-MBC             SOL-MBR
                                                                                                              Cut-Out                          Cut-Out                 1000
                                                                                                                For                              For
                                                                                                              S2 Mixer                         S2 Mixer




                                                        Cut-Out                                       SOL-SB                                       SOL-SB
                      1500 (SOL-SB1500) or                For                                          1000                                         1000
                      1300 (SOL-SB1300)                 S2 Mixer                                                                                                                 1000
                                                                                                      SOL-D8


                                                                                                                                 1000
                                                                                                                                                        600
                                                        900
                                                                                                                                 2200


                            Side View                                                             Side View


                                          425                                                                        425
                             SOL-D8                                                                   SOL-D8


                                                 SOL-CVR80
                                                           631      736                                                                                 631        736 + 40 (adjustable
                             SOL-B12                                                                  SOL-B12                                           + 40                leg height)



                        All dimensions in mm.

Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                                63
                                                                                                                            S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S


                                                  Ta l k b a c k - D e s k t o p a n d R a c k m o u n t e d Sys t e m s
                                                                Talkback refers to the standard method of                                          The talkback outputs and input are
                                                                                                                                                   balanced signals on a 15-way male D-type
                                                                communication between broadcast studios.                                           plug and the talkback input can be
                                                                Each studio has either a desktop, a rack-mount, or                                 adjusted from -28dB to 9dB using a rear
                                                                mixer-mounted intercom, usually containing a row                                   panel preset pot.

                                                  of switch buttons. Each switch button connects to another studio                                 Onboard Electret Mic
                                                  when pressed, and routes the presenter audio to it.                                              or External Mic
                                                                                                                                                   You can speak to the separate locations
                                                  There are 4 products in the Sonifex Talkback Intercom range :                                    using the onboard front-panel electret mic
                                                                                                                                                   or there is a separate external mic input on
                                                  TB-6D 6 Way Talkback Intercom, desktop free standing                                             a 3 pin XLR female connector, into which
                                                                                                                                                   you can plug a suitable gooseneck
                                                  TB-6R 6 Way Talkback Intercom, 19" rack mounted                                                  microphone.
                                                  TB-SD Station Master Talkback Intercom, desktop free standing                                    There is a rear panel switch to select
S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S




                                                                                                                                                   between the electret and separate input
                                                  TB-SR Station Master Talkback Intercom, 19" rack mounted                                         mic. The mic input gain range is adjustable
                                                  The TB-6D and TB-6R are general talkback interfaces which can                                    via a rear panel preset pot between 74dB
                                                                                                                                                   and 53dB.
                                                  be connected together to form a talkback system. The TB-SD and
                                                  TB-SR are talkback units which only operate when connected to                                    Monitoring External Inputs
                                                                                                                                                   The unit can monitor two external sources.
                                                  the Sonifex Station Master studio switcher.                                                      The EXT 1 input is a balanced stereo input
                                                                                                                                                   on a rear panel 9 pin D-type socket. The EXT
                                                                                                     other. On each panel, there are 6 front       2 input is an unbalanced stereo input on
                                                    TB-6D & TB-6R 6 Way
                                                                                                     panel buttons for talkback selection and      the 9 pin D-type socket as well as dual
                                                    Talkback Intercoms
                                                                                                     2 for external inputs. When a button is       phono sockets. EXT 1 is useful for
                                                                                                     pressed, the button lights up and the         monitoring a distributed signal, such as a
                                                  The TB-6D and TB-6R are used for general
                                                                                                     talkback is active to that location.          radio tuner off-air feed, or an outside source
                                                  talkback between studios and use
                                                                                                                                                   routed from an ISDN codec. EXT 2 is useful
                                                  DC signalling, also known as ground lifting
                                                                                                                                                   for monitoring a local source, such as a
                                                  or ground signalling, to communicate with
                                                                                                                                                   portable minidisc/flashcard recorder/player,
                                                  each other. These units can be installed in
                                                                                                                                                   or the unbalanced soundcard output from a
                                                  various locations throughout a studio
                                                  complex and linked to one another, with
                                                  each unit being able to talkback to up to 6
                                                                                                     “   The TB-6D is used for
                                                                                                     communicating with up to six
                                                                                                     other locations using the onboard
                                                                                                                                                   PC editing/playback package.


                                                  others connected together. Most other
                                                                                                     electret mic. It can also monitor two
                                                  talkback systems in general operation also
                                                  use DC signalling, so you should be able
                                                  to add these units into an existing
                                                  installation.
                                                                                                     external sources.
                                                                                                                        ”
                                                  Desktop Or Rackmount
                                                  The TB-6D and TB-6R are identical in
                                                                                                    Press & Release,
                                                                                                    Press & Hold Operation
                                                  operation, with the TB-6D used for desktop
                                                                                                    The buttons work with both a momentary         TB-6D Rear View.
                                                  operation and the TB-6R available as a 2U
                                                                                                    and latched operation. If you simply press
                                                  rack-mount, for use for example, in a central
                                                                                                    the button, talkback will be on and can be     If you already use a mixer which has a
                                                  apparatus room or central technical area.
                                                                                                    cancelled by pressing the button again. If     talkback input and output, or continuous
                                                  Talkback For Up To 7 locations                    you press and hold the button, the             talkback output, or just a line level output
                                                  Up to 7 locations or studios can                  selection is cancelled when released. So, if   which you want to use, by changing
                                                  communicate with each                             you wanted to listen to an external input,     internal jumpers the intercom can be
                                                                                                             such as the radio station feed, or    configured to use these connections
                                                                                                                 off-air monitor, you could        instead of the on-board microphone and
                                                                                                                  simply press the EXT 1 button.   speaker/headphones. For example, if you
                                                                                                                   If you receive talkback from    have a mic channel on a mixer assigned to
                                                                                                                    another studio when the        talkback and the presenter is using
                                                                                                                     external input buttons are    headphones for monitoring the mixer
                                                                                                      also pressed, the external inputs can be     talkback, the Talkback Intercom can be used
                                                                                                    either muted or mixed, depending on the        purely for talkback switching and for
                                                  TB-6D 6 Way Talkback Intercom Front View.         setting of an internal jumper.                 monitoring external inputs.


64                                                                                  Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S


Ta l k b a c k - D e s k t o p a n d R a c k m o u n t e d Sys t e m s
                                                                                               D-type External Input connector, for
                                                                                               example, when used in an area with live
                                                                                               microphones. Both monitor and headphone
                                                                                               levels are fully adjustable between
                                                                                               -60dB and 9dB using the front panel
                                                                                               volume control.

                                                TB-6R Front View.


Built-in Loudspeaker                            headphones provide 150mW into 32-600
& Headphones                                    headphones. When the headphones are
For monitoring, you can use either the built-   used, the speaker is automatically muted.
in 1W loudspeaker, or headphones on a           Additionally, the monitor speaker can be
6.35mm unbalanced stereo jack. The              muted via a remote contact on the 9 pin        TB-6R Rear View.




                                                                                                                                         S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S
   Radio Studio Application Using TB-6D & TB-6R
   A typical application would be to             location and the radio station output        Linking the studios in this way allows
   distribute talkback and audio feeds           from an off-air receiver is distributed on   all locations to talk to each other
   around a radio or TV studio complex,          input EXT 1 of each unit.                    together with the ability to monitor
   as in this diagram.                                                                        2 external feeds, with independent
                                                 The EXT 2 input could be used in the         control of monitor muting and
   The TB-6D and TB-6R units are daisy-          news or sales area for monitoring local      headphone/speaker
   chained together from location to             sources such as a PC audio output.           levels.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                               65
                                                                                                                          S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S


                                                  Ta l k b a c k - D e s k t o p a n d R a c k m o u n t e d Sys t e m s
                                                     Radio Studio Application Using TB-SD & TB-SR
                                                     Using the Station Master as the core          audio feeds around a small radio station,     the central hub and unbalanced
                                                     of a complete studio air-switching,           as in this diagram.                           point-to-point links from it to each
                                                     distribution and talkback system, up to                                                     location. This setup could also be used
                                                     4 studios can be connected using the          The TB-SD and TB-SR intercoms are             for controlling on-air switching and for
                                                     TB-SD and TB-SR. A typical application        connected to the Station Master in a          distribution of the external inputs to the
                                                     would be to distribute talkback and           star pattern, with the Station Master as      other locations.
S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S




                                                   TB-SD & TB-SR
                                                   Station Master Talkback
                                                   Intercom Overview

                                                  These units are used for interfacing with the
                                                  Sonifex Station Master studio switcher and
                                                  are similar to the 6 way talkback intercoms,
                                                  except that the talkback routing and                                                           female D-type. This contains switch and
                                                  switching (DC signalling) is handled by the     TB-SR Front View.                              indicator controls for the 4 talkback
                                                  Station Master.                                                                                buttons together with power and talkback
                                                                                                                                                 input/output/control lines to and from
                                                                                                  can be used to communicate with up to 4
                                                                                                                                                 the Station Master.
                                                                                                  other locations (including the Station
                                                                                                  Master), or all of the locations by pressing
                                                                                                  the "ALL" button.

                                                                                                  Whereas the TB-6D and TB-6R have talkback
                                                                                                  outputs and input on a 15-way male D-type
                                                                                                  plug, the TB-SD and TB-SR have instead a
                                                                                                  remotes socket consisting of a 25-way
                                                                                                                                                 TB-SR Rear View.

                                                  TB-SD Front View.


                                                  Talkback For Up To 5 Locations
                                                  All of the features regarding level control,
                                                  use of the microphone, speaker,
                                                  headphones, volume control and external
                                                                                                                                                 “    Although similar to the
                                                                                                                                                 TB-6D, the TB-SD talkback intercom
                                                                                                                                                 is used for interfacing with the
                                                  inputs are the same as for the TB-6D and TB-
                                                  6R intercoms. However, the TB-SD and TB-SR      TB-SD Rear View.
                                                                                                                                                 Sonifex Station Master.
                                                                                                                                                                             ”
66                                                                               Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S


Ta l k b a c k - D e s k t o p a n d R a c k m o u n t e d Sys t e m s

      Talkback Intercom Systems Block Diagram




                                                                                                                                                                    S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S
 Features                                       Talkback Intercoms Technical Specification

 • Provide talkback for up to 7 locations      Audio & Power Specification
                                               Talkback Input/Outputs                  15 way male D-type plug (TB-6D & TB-6R) for 6 balanced talkback outputs
   (TB-6D & TB-6R) or locations (TB-SD &                                               and 1 balanced talkback input
   TB-SR).                                     Talkback Input Gain Range               9dB to -28dB adjusted by rear panel preset pot
                                               External Inputs & Mute                  9 way female D-type socket, for stereo balanced external input 1, stereo
                                                                                       unbalanced external input 2 (or external talkback input/output), talkback
 • Brightly lit push-to-talk buttons.                                                  control output and mute input
                                               External Input 2                        Dual phono socket, stereo unbalanced in parallel with the 9 way female
 • Momentary or latched buttons.                                                       D-type socket
                                               External Inputs Impedance               > 30k unbalanced
 • Built-in electret microphone, with                                                  > 40k balanced
                                               External Talkback Input Impedance       > 30k unbalanced
   input for external microphone.              External Talkback Output Impedance      < 80 unbalanced
                                               External Microphone Input               3 pin female XLR socket
 • Monitoring of 2 external inputs,            Mic Input Impedance                     1.5k balanced
   e.g. for off-air receiver.                  Microphone Input Gain Range             74dB to 53dB adjusted by rear panel preset pot
                                               Headphone Output                        6.35mm jack, unbalanced stereo capable of driving 150mW into 32-600
                                                                                       headphones
 • Auto-muting, or mixing, of external         Headphone Output Gain Range             9dB to <-60dB (off ) adjusted by front panel pot
   inputs, when talkback is active.            Station Master Remotes                  25 way female D-type socket (TB-SD & TB-SR)
                                               Loudspeaker Power                       1W
 • Integrates with Sonifex S2 mixer            Mains Input Power                       85V - 264V AC, 47-63Hz, max 10W
                                               Fuse Holder                             1A anti-surge fuse
   and is compatible with other talkback
                                               Physical Specification
   systems.                                    Order Code       Description                  Height     Width      Depth     Total Nett Weight Total Gross Weight
                                               TB-6D            6 Way Talkback intercom,
                                                                desk units                   6.1cm      22cm       17.0cm          1.25kg                2.0kg
                                               TB-SD            Station Master Talkback
Sonifex S2 Mixer Meterbridge                                    intercom, desk units
Talkback Panels                                TB-6R            6 Way Talkback intercom,
                                                                19" rack mounted             8.9cm     48.3cm      18.5cm          2.60kg                4.0kg
For details of the Meterbridge Panels          TB-SR            Station Master Talkback
see page 55.                                                    intercom, 19" rack mounted    (2U)    (19" rack)




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                          67
                                                                                                                        S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S


                                                  Station Master


                                                  Station Master is part of the
                                                  Sonifex range of professional
                                                  audio products designed for
                                                  building radio stations on a
                                                  budget. It combines into a
                                                  single package all the
                                                  equipment required for audio
                                                  distribution, studio switching,
                                                  talkback and monitoring for up                                                           Station Master Front View.

                                                  to 4 studios.
S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S




                                                                                            Studio Switching                               and four external sources such as news
                                                                                            Station Master accepts stereo audio feeds      feeds or off air receivers.
                                                                                            from up to 4 studios, switching them
                                                                                                                                           The audio can be monitored via
                                                                                            individually to transmission using Offer
                                                                                                                                           headphones, or output to a power amplifier,
                                                                                            and Accept operation. The output of the
                                                                                                                                           or via the internal power amplifier, capable
                                                                                            current on-air studio is distributed to the
                                                                                                                                           of driving 10W into 8 speakers. There are
                                                                                            other studios via a dedicated bus, avoiding
                                                                                                                                           also two ¼" jack insert points on the front
                                                                                            the need for multiple studio distribution
                                                                                                                                           panel for using the Station Master to
                                                                                            links.
                                                                                                                                           monitor from a jack-field.
                                                                                            The output of the Station Master is
                                                                                            provided as a stereo pair and as a             Audio Distribution
                                                                                            mono-feed of the stereo source. The studio     Station Master distributes up to 4 incoming
                                                                                            switching is achieved using latching relays    stereo signals to each of the connected
                                                                                            which retain their switch status if a power-   studios without the need for external
                                                                                            failure occurs.                                distribution amplifiers. These signals, such
                                                                                                                                           as off-air receivers, news feeds and outside
                                                                                            Delay Control                                  broadcasts, can be professional balanced
                                                                                            A profanity delay can be controlled by the     inputs or at domestic unbalanced line
                                                                                            Station Master allowing you to install just    levels. The gain of the incoming stereo
                                                                                            one delay unit that can be shared by your      signals can be adjusted from the front


                                                  “
                                                                                            studios and used by the studio currently       panel. Distribution gain is controlled by a
                                                       Station Master combines
                                                                                            on-air.                                        preset potentiometer.
                                                  all audio distribution, studio
                                                  switching, talkback and                   Monitoring                                     Talkback
                                                  monitoring equipment into a               The Station Master is fitted with a pair of    The Station Master's talkback system acts as
                                                                                            true PPM meters, or VU meters, for             the master station for talkback with 4
                                                  single package.
                                                                 ”                          monitoring up to 8 stereo sources. These
                                                                                            sources consist of the connected studios
                                                                                                                                           satellite systems. These can either be the
                                                                                                                                           connected studios or other locations such




                                                                                            Station Master Rear View.



68                                                                          Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S


Station Master
                                              as a record library or engineering workshop.      Power Failure
                                              Individual satellites can talk to each other or   In the event of a power failure to the
                                              broadcast to all stations.                        Station Master, it will continue to route the
                                                                                                current on-air studio to the stereo
                                              Logging                                           transmission output. Also, when power is
                                              To allow for logging of broadcasts the            re-applied, all switching, including the Offer
                                              Station Master has a stereo balanced output       and Accept switching, will re-initialise to the
                                              for professional logging equipment,               configuration when power was lost. This
                                              together with 3 sets of phono unbalanced          means that your on-air studio can continue
                                              outputs for connection to domestic                transmitting, even if power to the Station
                                              VCR/DVD equipment.                                Master has failed.



 Saves you money                                  Station Master System Block Diagram




                                                                                                                                                  S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S
 Combining several features into one unit
 gives significant cost savings over
 purchasing the discrete parts that Station
 Master replaces, without any
 compromise on quality.

 Easy to install
 A single unit simplifies installation
 allowing cables to be neatly routed with
 a minimum of connection distances
 between audio circuits.

 Requires less space
 Station Master is a 3U high 19" single
 rackmount unit which replaces up to 11U
 of rack space that discrete components
 can occupy.

 Offers high reliability
 If power to the Station Master fails, it
 keeps the output routing as set and
 remembers this state, providing
 continuity on restoration of power.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                        69
                                                                                                                    S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S


                                                  Station Master
                                                                                   When a studio is on-air, it has accepted the                    lights in other studios are simultaneously
                                                                                   request to transmit and the Accept lamp is                      extinguished. Station Master's front panel
                                                                                   illuminated. When a studio reaches the end                      shows the status of studios with a LED
                                                                                   of its broadcast, the presenter presses the                     indication.
                                                                                   Offer button and the Offer buttons in all
                                                                                   connected studios will illuminate to                            Talkback Connections
                                                                                   indicate that the transmission is ready to be                   Talkback switches must be connected to
                                                                                   passed to another studio.                                       each studio. Station Master has a set of
                                                                                                                                                   switches for communication with these
                                                                                                                                                   studios, together with a talkback level


                                                                                   “    Station Master distributes up to
                                                                                   4 incoming stereo signals to each of
                                                                                   the connected studios without the
                                                                                                                                                   control for altering the level of talkback
                                                                                                                                                   received from other studios to the in-built
                                                                                                                                                   speaker. A microphone can be plugged
                                                                                                                                                   directly into the front of the Station Master
                                                                                   need for external distribution
                                                                                                                                                   for sending talkback to other studios, the
                                                                                   amplifiers.
                                                                                                   ”
S W I TC H E R & TA L K B AC K I N T E R CO M S




                                                                                                                                                   level of which may be adjusted via the mic
                                                                                                                                                   level potentiometer. Talkback is operated by
                                                                                   Offer And Accept Switching -                                    pressing and holding down the button for
                                                                                   How It Works                                                    the chosen studio.
                                                                                   To Accept the offer, a studio must bring up
                                                                                                                                                   The Station Master is compatible with the
                                                                                   the "Last Studio to Offer" on the mixer and
                                                                                                                                                   TB-SD and TB-SR talkback intercoms.
                                                                                   press the Accept button.
                                                                                   The transmission path is then immediately                       A 2 studio version can be upgraded to a
                                                                                   taken from the accepting studio and its                         4 studio version by adding the optional
                                                                                   Accept light is illuminated. All the Offer                      SM2 switching card.



                                                                                     Station Master Technical Specification
                                                                                    Inputs/Outputs
                                                                                    Transmission Outputs:             Balanced feed-through of transmission inputs via relay contacts
                                                                                    Mono Output:                      <75 electronically balanced
                                                                                    Stereo Line Inputs:               >20k electronically balanced
                                                                                    Stereo Line Outputs:              <75 electronically balanced
                                                                                    Professional Logging Outputs:     <75 electronically balanced
                                                                                    Domestic Logging Outputs:         <75 unbalanced
                                                                                    Domestic Monitor Outputs:         <75 unbalanced
                                                                                    Monitor Speaker Outputs:          10 Watts into 8
                                                                                    Monitor Insert Input:             >20k electronically balanced
                                                                                    Headphone Output:                 Drives 600 stereo headphones
                                                                                    Talkback Mic Input:               >1.5k electronically balanced
                                                                                    Talkback Line Inputs:             >10k unbalanced
                                                                                    Switch Inputs:                    Momentary closure to common.
                                                                                    Lamp Outputs:                     Open Collector reference to common
                                                                                                                      Voltage for lamps is supplied
                                                                                    Frequency Response
                                                                                    Mic Input:                        40Hz to 20kHz, -1dB, +0dB
                                                                                    Line Inputs:                      20Hz to 20kHz, -0.5dB, +0dB
                                                                                    Noise (20Hz to 20kHz)
                                                                                    Mic Input E.I.N.:                 -128dB with 200     source
                                                                                    Stereo Line Inputs:               -96dB (ref. +8dB)
                                                                                    Connections
                                                                                    Transmission Outputs:             3 x XLR 3 pin male balanced (1 stereo, 1 mono)
                                                                                    Mono Output:                      XLR 3 pin male balanced
                                                                                    Stereo Line External Inputs:      25 pin D-type plug male
                                                                                    Studio Line Inputs/Outputs:       25 pin D-type plug male
                                                                                    Studio Talkback & Controls:       25 pin D-type socket female
                                                                                    Talkback Mic Input:               XLR 3 pin female balanced
                                                                                    Professional Logging Outputs:     3 x XLR 3 pin male balanced (1 stereo, 1 mono)
                                                                                    Domestic Logging Outputs:         3 x Phono sockets unbalanced
                                                                                    Domestic Monitor Output:          Phono sockets unbalanced
                                                                                    Monitor Speaker Outputs:          Quick connect spring loaded lever terminals
                                                                                    Headphones:                       ¼" Stereo jack socket
                                                                                    Monitor Insert:                   2 x ¼" Stereo jack sockets
                                                                                    Equipment Type
                                                                                    SM24-PPM or SM24-VU:              Station Master with switching and talkback for 2 studios (PPM meters, or VU meters)
                                                                                    SM44-PPM or SM44-VU:              Station Master with switching and talkback for 4 studios (PPM meters, or VU meters)
                                                                                    SM2:                              Add-on cards to upgrade from SM24 to SM44
                                                                                    Physical Specification
                                                                                    Dimensions:                       13.5 cm (3U) (H) x 48.3 cm (19" Rack fitting) (W) x 30 cm (D)
                                                                                    Weight:                           12.0 kgs. (Shipping weight : 15kg)




70                                                                 Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
T E L E P H O N E HYB R I D S


Te l e p h o n e H y b r i d s - I n t r o d u c t i o n
 What Is A Telephone Hybrid ?

Telephone hybrids, or                         They provide protection for your                be connected to the studio mixing console.
                                              equipment and the public telephone lines,       Most of the other units are supplied to
telephone balance units (TBUs)                allowing for varying line signals and line      communication operations for allowing
provide the interface between                 conditions. Automatically cancelling out        extremely effective conversion between
professional audio equipment                  the unwanted signal they also facilitate        4-wire audio circuits and standard
and the public telephone                      two-way communication down a single             telephone lines.
                                              telephone line.
network.                                                                                      A ringing detector can be used when you
                                              Each hybrid has a telephone line
                                                                                              need to answer a call automatically, for
                                              connection, a handset connection and
                                                                                              instance, if a journalist files a report to a
                                              separate terminals for audio input and
                                                                                              tape recorder over a telephone line, the call
                                              output from a broadcast mixer, or other
                                                                                              can be picked up after a set number of rings




                                                                                                                                              TELEPHONE BALANCE UNITS
                                              professional audio source.
                                                                                              by the ringing detector. Both the HY-03 &
                                              A large proportion of Sonifex hybrids are       DHY-03 have a built in ringing detector that
                                              used in radio and television broadcasting       is enabled by one of the configuration
                                              applications for allowing external callers to   settings switches on the rear panel.




                                               Introduction




                                              Analogue or Digital ?                           • Echo cancellation is possible and


“    Both of these products are
operating on analogue telephone
                                              Sonifex offers two different hybrid units -
                                              the HY-03 analogue TBU and the DHY-03
                                              DSP based TBU.
                                                                                                distortion of other mixed signals is
                                                                                                greatly improved.
lines, not ISDN digital lines.
                                ”             The analogue HY-03 hybrid is suitable for
                                              most general telephony applications and is
                                              often used in radio and TV stations, dealing
                                                                                              • Digital hybrids are more tolerant to
                                                                                                fluctuating line conditions and are
                                                                                                especially suitable for dealing with calls
                                                                                                that have a slight signal delay, for
                                              floors and bingo halls. The HY-03 can be          example, satellite and conference calls.
                                              used for any application where a clean            The DHY-03 can recall signals from its
                                              telephone signal is required and the line is      memory buffer and allow for these delays
                                              not subject to signal delay.                      without impairing performance.

                                              The DHY-03 offers near perfect                  Note that both of these products are
                                              performance, using DSP power to                 operating on analogue telephone lines,
                                              dramatically improve the unit's operation.      not ISDN digital lines. The "analogue" and
                                              The DHY-03 offers the features of the HY-03,    "digital" refer to the processing used in
                                              but has some other benefits:                    the units.




Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                    71
                                                                                                                              T E L E P H O N E HYB R I D S


                          HY- 0 3 - S e r i e s (A n a l o g u e )



                                                                   The analogue HY-03 telephone hybrid is the replacement for the
                                                                   HY-02, which for many years has set the standard as an excellent
                                                                   value, high quality telephone hybrid.
TELEPHONE BALANCE UNITS




                                                                   The HY-03 retains many of the features of                 disconnect using the optional


                          “   Each hybrid has a telephone line
                          connection, a handset connection
                          and separate terminals for audio
                                                                   the HY-02 and adds some additional ones.
                                                                   Some of the features of the HY-03 include :
                                                                   • Fully automatic - adapts to varying line
                                                                     conditions and has automatic signal
                                                                                                                             HY-03DTD board. The HY-03DTD board
                                                                                                                             can be configured to disconnect on
                                                                                                                             recognizing the dial tone used in a
                                                                                                                             specific country.
                          input and output from a broadcast          limiting.                                           •   Line limiter, bandpass filter and output
                          mixer, or other professional             • Local and remote line hold switching -                  noise gate with preset threshold
                          audio source.
                                       ”                             calls can be remotely switched through
                                                                     a mixing console.
                                                                   • Momentary or permanent latching
                                                                     remotes can be enabled.
                                                                                                                         •
                                                                                                                         •
                                                                                                                             providing low distortion crystal
                                                                                                                             clear audio.
                                                                                                                             28dB typical line balance rejection.
                                                                                                                             Built in power supply with switchable
                                                                   • Balanced mic/line input - 10k balanced                  115V, or 230V, mains input.
                                                                     input selectable for 0dBu clean feed line,          •   BABT approval compliant with
                                                                     or microphone level with adjustable gain.               European PTT specifications.
                                                                   • Balanced output - 0dBu low impedance
                                                                     balanced output, with output gain
                                                                                                                         Which Format Is Most Suitable ?
                                                                                                                         The HY-03 analogue hybrids are available
                                                                     adjustment.
                                                                                                                         in three models :
                                                                   • Mixed output - the output can be a mix
                                                                     of the caller and mic/line input signals for        HY-03 Single free-standing automatic
                                                                     recording both sides of the telephone               analogue TBU.
                                                                     conversation.
                                                                                                                         HY-03S Single 19" rack mounted
                                                                   • Integrated ring detector - automatic call
                                                                                                                         automatic analogue TBU with ringing
                                                                     answering after a pre-determined
                                                                                                                         detector.
                                                                     number of rings.
                                                                   • Fitted with K-break disconnect detection            HY-03T Twin 19" rack mounted automatic
                                                                     as standard with an option for dial-tone            analogue TBU.



                                                                   HY-03




                                                                   HY-03 - Front & Rear Single Free-Standing Automatic Analogue TBU.



72                                                 Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
T E L E P H O N E HYB R I D S


HY- 0 3 - S e r i e s (A n a l o g u e )
HY-03S




HY-03S - Front & Rear Single 19” Rack Mounted Automatic Analogue TBU.


HY-03T




                                                                                                                                                                           TELEPHONE BALANCE UNITS
HY-03T - Front & Rear Twin 19” Rack Mounted Automatic Analogue TBU.



  Technical Specification
 Audio Specification For HY-03
 Input Impedance - Line Mode (Clean Feed):
 Input Impedance - Microphone Mode:
 Clean Feed Limiting Input:
                                                  10k balanced 0dB
                                                  200 balanced
                                                  +4dBu
                                                                                                                                   “    Sonifex have manufactured
                                                                                                                                   telephone hybrids for many years
                                                                                                                                   and have a reputation for
 Microphone Level Range:                          From 74dB to 40dB adjusted by preset pot                                         quality combined with the highest
 Bandwidth to Telephone Line:                     250Hz - 4kHz, -3dB ref 1kHz
 Telephone Line Impedance:                        Nominally 600
                                                                                                                                   manufacturing standards.
 Telephone Line Impedance Range:                  300 to 1500                                                                      Every stage in the manufacture
 Output Impedance:                                50 balanced floating 0dBu
 Output Level Range:                              +8dB to -14dB adjusted by preset pot                                             of Sonifex products is carried out in
 Rejection Ratio:                                 45dB on 1kHz tone, typically 28dB on complex waveforms, reference peak           purpose built head-quarters in the
                                                  level of 0dB
 Ring Detector Sensitivity:                       1 ring to 6 rings                                                                heart of the UK, from initial design
 Power:                                           230V 50Hz, or 115V 60Hz. 6W for HY-03.

 Connections
 Mic/Line Input:
 Line Output:
                                                  XLR 3 pin female with push button mic/line selection
                                                  XLR 3 pin male
                                                                                                                                                            ”
                                                                                                                                   to final test and delivery.


 Telephone Line:                                  RJ11 6/4 socket
 Telephone Handset/Instrument:                    RJ11 6/4 socket
 Remotes:                                         9-way D-type socket
 Power:                                           IEC mains (CEE22)

 Each unit is supplied with 1 x RJ11 to RJ11 telephone line lead, 1 x RJ11 to BT plug telephone line lead, 1 x BT handset socket
 to RJ11 plug adapter, IEC mains lead fitted with moulded mains plug, handbook and warranty card.

 Order Code      Description                          Height              Width          Depth*       Total Nett     Total Gross
                                                                                                       Weight          Weight
 HY-03           Automatic analogue                    4.5cm             21.8cm          17.5cm         1.25kg          2.0kg
                 TBU, free standing
 HY-03S          Automatic analogue                  4.5cm (1U)          48.3cm          17.5cm         1.30kg          2.1kg
                 TBU, 19” rack mounted                               (19” rack width)
 HY-03T          Twin automatic analogue             4.5cm (1U)          48.3cm          17.5cm         2.60kg          4.0kg
                 TBU, 19” rack mounted                               (19” rack width)
 *Depth is measured from the front to the end of the connectors fitted to the back of the unit.
 Note: If you are ordering the HY-03 for use in the USA, add the word “US” after the product code. If you are using the HY-03
 with the Broadcast Bionics PhoneBox system, then add the word ”BB” after the product code. The HY-03 uses different
 circuitry for these systems.
 Accessories
 Order Code Description
 HY-03DTD         Dial tone detect add-on board
 HY-03CON         Front panel conversion kit, HY-03S 19" rack-mount front to HY-03 free standing
 HY-03SCON Front panel conversion kit, HY-03 free standing to HY-03S 19" rack-mount front
 HY-03TCON Front panel conversion kit, HY-03 or HY-03S, to HY-03T19" rack-mount front
 HY-02EC          Eurocard version of HY-02 analogue TBU (non RoHS)
 RD-02EC          Eurocard version of ringing detector (non RoHS)


Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                                                 73
                                                                                                                           T E L E P H O N E HYB R I D S


                          D HY- 0 3 - S e r i e s ( D i g i t a l )
TELEPHONE BALANCE UNITS




                            The digital DHY-03 telephone              The DHY-03 has the following features :             Country selection allows the unit to
                                                                      • Fully automatic - adapts to varying line          provide line impedance and a simulation
                            hybrid is probably the best                 conditions and has automatic signal               circuit to match the country.
                            performing digital hybrid in                limiting.                                     •   RS232 serial port for remote control of
                            the world, with simply                    • Fully adaptive echo cancellation to               the TBU, DTMF tone dialling and firmware
                            stunning line balance rejection             127msec - default is 24msec.                      upgrades to add new country settings.
                                                                      • 72dB typical line balance rejection           •   Remote port distributes the remote line
                            figures. For the best sounding              offering superb performance and crystal           connect switch and tally output, a
                            audio calls you're likely to                clear audio.                                      momentary/latch selector and the DTMF
                            hear, you should specify the              • Front panel input and output gain                 detect output.

                            DHY-03.                                     controls.
                                                                      • Front panel LED metering of receive and
                                                                                                                      •   The remote line connect switch can be
                                                                                                                          either momentary or latching in its action.
                                                                        send signals.                                 •   Balanced mic/line input - 10k balanced
                                                                      • Built-in conferencing for 2 hybrids, so           input selectable for 0dBu clean feed
                                                                        that a single telco channel on a mixing           line, or microphone level with
                                                                        desk can receive 2 calls.                         adjustable gain.
                                                                      • Integrated ring detector - automatic call     •   Balanced output - 0dBu low impedance
                                                                        answering after a pre-determined                  balanced output, with output gain
                                                                        number of rings.                                  settings.
                                                                      • Automatic call disconnection. Fitted with     •   Record output - the conferencing output
                                                                        K-break, line polarity reversal and dial          can be set via a jumper to give a mix of
                                                                        tone disconnect detection, defined by             the caller and mic/line input signals for
                                                                        the country selection.                            recording both sides of the telephone
                                                                      • Automatic ducking facility allows the             conversation.
                                                                        talent to 'shout-down', or talk over, a       •   Line limiter, bandpass filter and output
                                                                        caller by reducing the gain of the caller's       noise gate with preset threshold
                                                                        signal if it goes above a certain level.          providing low distortion audio.
                                                                      • Local and remote line hold switching -        •   Built in universal power supply between
                                                                        calls can be remotely switched through a          90V AC and 250V AC, 47-63Hz, IEC
                                                                        mixing console.                                   mains input.
                                                                      • Line hold/release button to control line      •   ETSI approval compliant with European
                                                                        hold circuit, illuminates to indicate the         PTT specifications.
                                                                        status of the line and flashes to show
                                                                        ring status.                                  Which Format Is Most Suitable ?
                                                                      • DTMF tone recognition allowing a opto-        The DHY-03 analogue hybrids are available
                                                                        isolated GPI output to be made on             in three models :
                                                                        receipt of selected DTMF tones, e.g. for      • DHY-03 Single free-standing automatic
                                                                        starting a studio automation recorder            digital TBU.
                                                                        automatically to record a remote              • DHY-03S Single 19" rack mounted
                                                                        telephone interview.                             automatic digital TBU.
                                                                      • International operation with built-in         • DHY-03T Twin 19" rack mounted
                                                                        configurable settings for each country.          automatic digital TBU.


74                                                  Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
T E L E P H O N E HYB R I D S


D HY- 0 3 - S e r i e s ( D i g i t a l )
DHY-03EC Automatic Digital                              • The level meters are 2 tricolour LEDs.        DHY-03RLY Latching Handset
Telephone Balance Unit                                  • The level switches are now onboard            Relay Option for DHY-03, S and T
Eurocard                                                  3 way jumpers.                                When a call is received on the TBU, the call
The DHY-03EC eurocard single digital                    • The remote outputs are connected via          may be diverted to the telephone hybrid by
telephone hybrid uses the same                            slide switches which means that the           pressing either the front panel mounted
technology as the DHY-03 but is based                     output signal can be either +5V, +15V or      line connect button or by means of the
in a card-style format for installation in a              pull down to ground.                          remote connect switch. At this point the
eurocard rack frame, or in certain                      • The handset is connected to the               telephone handset must be replaced,
broadcast mixers. Eurocards are supplied                  telephone line via a divert relay.            otherwise the line will be double
without a power supply, or casing, and are                                                              terminated resulting in poorer performance.
therefore significantly cheaper than the                                                                Order the accessory DHY-03RLY in order to
other units. It is pin compatible with the                                                              have a divert relay to automatically
older DHY-02EC eurocard, but has the                                                                    disconnect the handset.
outstanding performance and most of the
features of the DHY-03, with a few




                                                                                                                                                       TELEPHONE BALANCE UNITS
differences:
• The analogue input is line level only,
   though the 10dB professional/
   consumer jumper is retained.
• There is no conferencing facility and                DHY-03EC - Automatic Digital Telephone Balance   DHY-03RLY - DHY-03RLY Latching Handset Relay
   consequently no record output option.               Unit Eurocard.                                   Option for DHY-03, S and T.


DHY-03




DHY-03 - Front & Rear Single Free-Standing Automatic Digital TBU.

DHY-03S




DHY-03S - Front & Rear Single 19" Rack Mounted Automatic Digital TBU.

DHY-03T




DHY-03T - Front & Rear Twin 19" Rack Mounted Automatic Digital TBU.



Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk                                             75
                                                                                                                                                              T E L E P H O N E HYB R I D S


                          D HY- 0 3 - S e r i e s ( D i g i t a l )
                           Technical Specification
                          Audio Specification For DHY-03
                          Input Impedance - Line Mode (Clean Feed):             10k     balanced 0dB
                          Input Impedance - Conferencing:                       10k     balanced 0dB (not for DHY-03EC)
                          Input Impedance - Microphone Mode:                    2k    balanced (not for DHY-03EC)
                          Input Level Gain Range:                               +6dB, 0dB, and -6dB adjusted by 3-position front panel switch,
                                                                                +10dB jumper
                          Microphone Level Gain Preset:                         From 65dB to 35dB (not for DHY-03EC)
                          Maximum Input Levels:                                 Line +26dBu, mic -24dBu
                          Clean Feed Limiting Input:                            -4dBu for CTR21 setting, other values available *
                          Bandwidth to Telephone Line:                          250Hz - 4kHz, -3dB ref 1kHz
                          Telephone Line Impedance:                             600 , 900      plus 14 other complex impedance circuits *
                          Output Impedance - Line Out:                          50    balanced floating 0dBu
                          Output Impedance - Conference/Record:                 50    balanced floating 0dBu
                          Output Level Gain Range:                              +6db, 0dB, and -6dB adjusted by 3-position front panel switch
                          Rejection Ratio:                                      72dB on tones or complex waveforms, reference peak level of 0dB
TELEPHONE BALANCE UNITS




                          Ring Detector Sensitivity:                            Off, 2, 4 or 6 rings
                          Power to DHY-03, S & T                                Universal 12W power supply: 90 to 250V AC; 47-63Hz; fused 1A
                          Power to DHY-03EC                                     ±15 V DC @ 160mA per rail or regulated +5V DC @ 600mA

                          * These values are dependent on the actual country setting selected on the DHY-03


                          Connections
                          Mic/Line Input:                                       XLR 3 pin female, with push-button mic/line selection
                          Line Output:                                          XLR 3 pin male




                                                                                                                                                           “
                          Telephone Line:                                       RJ11 6/4 socket
                          Telephone Handset/Instrument:                         RJ11 6/4 socket                                                                For the best sounding audio calls
                          Conferencing or Record Audio:                         RJ45 socket                                                                you're likely to hear, you should

                                                                                                                                                                              ”
                          Remotes:                                              9-way D-type socket
                                                                                                                                                           specify the DHY-03.
                          RS232 Serial:                                         9-way D-type socket
                          Power:                                                IEC mains (CEE22)
                          Connections for Eurocard                              64 pin DIN 41612 male (plug)

                          Each DHY-03, S & T unit is supplied with 1 x RJ11 to RJ11 telephone line lead, 1 x RJ11 to BT plug telephone line lead, 1 x BT
                          handset socket to RJ11 plug adapter, IEC mains lead fitted with moulded mains plug, handbook and warranty card.


                          Physical Specification
                          Order Code Description                               Height            Width           Depth*        Total Nett    Total Gross
                                                                                                                                Weight         Weight

                          DHY-03          Automatic digital                     4.5cm            21.8cm          17.5cm           1.4kg          2.2kg
                                          TBU, free standing
                          DHY-03S         Automatic digital                   4.5cm (1U)        48.3cm           17.5cm          1.45kg          2.3kg
                                          TBU, 19" rack mounted                             (19" rack width)
                          DHY-03T         Twin automatic digital              4.5cm (1U)        48.3cm           17.5cm          2.80kg          4.4kg
                                          TBU, 19" rack mounted                             (19" rack width)
                          DHY-03EC        Automatic digital TBU
                                          with ringing detector
                                          Eurocard model
                                          (PCB 10x16cm)                      12.9cm (3U)       4.0cm (8E)        19.0cm           150g           500g

                          *Depth is measured from the front to the end of the connectors fitted to the back of the unit.


                          Accessories
                          Order Code                                            Description
                          DHY-03CON                                             Front Panel Conversion Kit, DHY-03S to DHY-03
                          DHY-03SCON                                            Front panel conversion kit, DHY-03 free standing to DHY-03S
                                                                                19" rack-mount front
                          DHY-03TCON                                            Front panel conversion kit, DHY-03 or DHY-03S, to DHY-03T
                                                                                19" rack-mount front
                          DHY-03CONF                                            Conference Cable to Connect 2 x DHY-03 Units
                          DHY-03RLY                                             Latching Handset Relay Option for DHY-03, S and T




76                                                                   Tel: +44 (0)1933 650 700 Fax: +44 (0)1933 650 726 Email: sales@sonifex.co.uk Internet: w w w.sonifex.co.uk
www.sonifex.co.uk
t:+44 (0)1933 650 700
f:+44 (0)1933 650 726
sales@sonifex.co.uk
61 Station Road
Ir thlingborough
Northants NN9 5QE
United Kingdom




                                          P R O D U C
                                          T
                                          C A T A L O G U E
                        Distributed By:

                                          2 0 0 6 / 7

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Stats:
views:151
posted:7/10/2011
language:English
pages:80